31010794-vrp1.5 command reference volume 1

HUAWEI®

1. Fundamental Configuration

2. Interface Configuration

3. Link Layer Protocol Configuration

4. Network Protocol Configuration

VRPUser Manual - Command ReferenceVolume 1

V200R001

VRP

User Manual – Command Reference

Volume 1

Manual Version T2-080194-20011213-C-1.5

Product Version V200R001

BOM 31010794

Copyright © 2001 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

®, HUAWEI®, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, , M900/M1800,TELESIGHT, Quidview, NETENGINE, Musa, OptiX, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia,VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Notice

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Althoughevery effort has been made to make this document as accurate, complete, andclear as possible, Huawei Technologies assumes no responsibility for any errorsthat may appear in this document.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Customer Service Building, Kefa Road, Science-basedIndustrial Park, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Zip code: 518057

Tel: +86-755-6540036

Fax: +86-755-6540035

Website: http://www.huawei.com

E-mail: [email protected]

http://www.huawei.com/

About This Manual

Contents

To help readers to better understand, use and maintain Quidway series routers, we publishthe manual suit of Quidway series routers. This manual suit includes:

VRP User Manual Configuration Guide (V1.5) -Volume 1 VRP User Manual Configuration Guide (V1.5) -Volume 2 VRP User Manual Configuration Guide (V1.5) -Volume 3 VRP User Manual Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 1 VRP User Manual Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 2 VRP User Manual Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 3 Quidway R1602 Router Installation Manual Quidway R1603/1604 Routers Installation Manual Quidway R2501 Router Installation Manual Quidway R2501E Router Installation Manual Quidway R2509/2511 Routers Installation Manual Quidway R2509E/2511E Routers Installation Manual Quidway R4001 Router Installation Manual Quidway R4001E Router Installation Manual Quidway R26/36 Modular Router Installation Manual

Among the manual suit, the first two manuals are applicable to all routers, and the otherinstallation manuals are separately used for their own types of routers.

In VRP User Manual Command Reference (V1.5) -Volume 1, the modules are arrangedas follows:

Module 1 Fundamental Configuration (01FC).

This module mainly introduces the fundamental configuration commands of Quidway seriesrouters software platform VRP1.5, including EXEC interface commands, systemmanagement commands, terminal service configuration commands, SNMP configurationcommands and maintenance and debug tool commands.

Module 2 Interface Configuration (02IC).

This module introduces in detail the interface configuration commands of Quidway seriesrouters, including Ethernet interface configuration commands, asynchronous serial portconfiguration commands, synchronous serial port configuration commands, ISDN BRIinterface configuration commands, cE1/PRI interface configuration commands. BecauseDialer configuration commands, sub-interface configuration commands, logic channelconfiguration commands of backup center and virtual interface template configurationcommands are related to specific performance configurations of the following modules, theyare not listed here.

Module 3 Link Layer Protocol Configuration (03LLC).

This module introduces in detail WAN protocol configuration commands supported byVRP1.5, including configuration commands of PPP, MP, SLIP, LAPB, X.25, X.25 Switch,

Frame Relay, ISDN and HDLC, etc. Because the configuration commands of SDLC areclosely related to those of SNA/DLSw, they are incorporated to chapter “DLSw ConfigurationCommands” in “Network Protocol Configuration”.

Module 4 Network Protocol Configuration (04NC).

This module introduces mainly network protocol configuration commands, includingconfiguration commands of IP address, IP performance, network address translation (NAT),IPX, VLAN and DLSw.

Note:

For questions regarding the product specifications, please confirm with the concerned personnel inHuawei's Enterprise Network Section as the software specifications are varied with the product of differenttype.

Target Readers

The manual is intended for the following readers:

Network engineers Technical assistance engineers Network administrators

Conventions Used in the Document

Keyboard operation

Format Description<Key > Press the key with key name expressed with a pointed

bracket, e.g. <Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A >.

<Key 1 + Key 2> Press the keys concurrently; e.g. <Ctrl+Alt+A> means thethree keys should be pressed concurrently.

<Key 1, Key 2> Press the keys in turn, e.g. <Alt, A> means the two keysshould be pressed in turn.

[Menu Option] The item with a square bracket indicates the menu option,e.g. [System] option on the main menu. The item with apointed bracket indicates the functional button option, e.g.<OK> button on some interface.

[Menu 1/Menu 2/Menu 3] Multi-level menu options, e.g. [System/Option/Color setup]on the main menu indicates [Color Setup] on the menuoption of [Option], which is on the menu option of [System].

Mouse operation

Action Description

Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button bydefault).

Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.

Drag Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.

Symbol

Some distinct symbols are employed in the manual to indicate the special notice thatshould be taken for the operation. The symbols are:

Caution, Notice, Warning, Danger: Notify the special attention that should begiven to the operation.

Note, Prompt, Tip, Thought: Give further necessary supplement or explanationfor the operation description.

HUAWEI®


01 – Fundamental Configuration (FC)

User Manual – Command Reference (Volume 1)Versatile Routing Platform Table of Contents

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 EXEC Interface Commands ....................................................................................... 1-11.1 configure ........................................................................................................................... 1-11.2 controller e1 ...................................................................................................................... 1-11.3 crypto ................................................................................................................................ 1-21.4 disable............................................................................................................................... 1-31.5 enable ............................................................................................................................... 1-31.6 exit .................................................................................................................................... 1-41.7 help ................................................................................................................................... 1-51.8 interface ............................................................................................................................ 1-51.9 language ........................................................................................................................... 1-71.10 logic-channel................................................................................................................... 1-71.11 route-map........................................................................................................................ 1-81.12 router............................................................................................................................... 1-81.13 vpdn-group...................................................................................................................... 1-91.14 show history.................................................................................................................. 1-10

Chapter 2 System Management Commands ............................................................................. 2-12.1 File Management Commands........................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 configfile ................................................................................................................. 2-12.1.2 copy........................................................................................................................ 2-22.1.3 download config ..................................................................................................... 2-32.1.4 erase ...................................................................................................................... 2-42.1.5 first-config............................................................................................................... 2-52.1.6 get .......................................................................................................................... 2-62.1.7 write........................................................................................................................ 2-82.1.8 show configfile........................................................................................................ 2-82.1.9 show running-config ............................................................................................... 2-92.1.10 show startup-config ............................................................................................ 2-10

2.2 FTP Server Configuration Commands ........................................................................... 2-102.2.1 ftp-server config-name ......................................................................................... 2-112.2.2 ftp-server enable .................................................................................................. 2-112.2.3 ftp-server system-name ....................................................................................... 2-122.2.4 ftp-server timeout ................................................................................................. 2-122.2.5 show ftp-server.................................................................................................... 2-13

2.3 Basic System Management Commands ........................................................................ 2-132.3.1 clock set ............................................................................................................... 2-132.3.2 hostname.............................................................................................................. 2-142.3.3 reboot ................................................................................................................... 2-152.3.4 setup..................................................................................................................... 2-152.3.5 show clock............................................................................................................ 2-172.3.6 show hostname .................................................................................................... 2-182.3.7 show queueing ..................................................................................................... 2-182.3.8 show version ........................................................................................................ 2-19

Chapter 3 Terminal Service Configuration Commands............................................................ 3-13.1 Terminal Service Attribute Configuration Commands ...................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 exec-timeout........................................................................................................... 3-13.2 Telnet Service Configuration Commands......................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 terminal telnet refuse-negotiation........................................................................... 3-13.2.2 telnet....................................................................................................................... 3-23.2.3 show client.............................................................................................................. 3-3

3.3 Terminal Server Configuration Commands ...................................................................... 3-33.3.1 async mode tty ....................................................................................................... 3-4


ii

3.3.2 autocommand ........................................................................................................ 3-43.3.3 tty logo-print............................................................................................................ 3-53.3.4 tty menu-key........................................................................................................... 3-63.3.5 tty-server app ......................................................................................................... 3-63.3.6 tty-server enable..................................................................................................... 3-73.3.7 tty-server source-ip ................................................................................................ 3-83.3.8 tty test-key.............................................................................................................. 3-93.3.9 show tty .................................................................................................................. 3-93.3.10 show tty-server ................................................................................................... 3-10

3.4 PRI Terminal Configuration Commands......................................................................... 3-103.4.1 pri-interactive........................................................................................................ 3-113.4.2 pri-autocommand ................................................................................................. 3-11

3.5 X.25 PAD configuration commands................................................................................ 3-123.5.1 login pad............................................................................................................... 3-123.5.2 pad ....................................................................................................................... 3-133.5.3 x29 inviteclear-time .............................................................................................. 3-143.5.4 show x25 pad ....................................................................................................... 3-143.5.5 debug pad ............................................................................................................ 3-15

3.6 Rlogin configuration command ....................................................................................... 3-163.6.1 rlogin..................................................................................................................... 3-16

Chapter 4 SNMP Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 4-14.1 SNMP Configuration Commands...................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 snmp-server community......................................................................................... 4-14.1.2 snmp-server contact............................................................................................... 4-24.1.3 snmp-server enable traps ...................................................................................... 4-24.1.4 snmp-server host ................................................................................................... 4-34.1.5 snmp-server location.............................................................................................. 4-34.1.6 snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1............................................................... 4-44.1.7 show snmp ............................................................................................................. 4-5

4.2 RMON configuration command ........................................................................................ 4-64.2.1 rmon promiscuous................................................................................................. 4-64.2.2 clear rmon statistics ............................................................................................... 4-64.2.3 show rmon statistics............................................................................................... 4-7

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Debugging Tool Commands ....................................................... 5-15.1 System Debugging Commands........................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 debug ..................................................................................................................... 5-15.1.2 show debugging ..................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Network Test Tool Commands ......................................................................................... 5-35.2.1 ping......................................................................................................................... 5-35.2.2 ping ipx ................................................................................................................... 5-45.2.3 tracert ..................................................................................................................... 5-5

5.3 Log Commands ................................................................................................................ 5-75.3.1 logging on............................................................................................................... 5-75.3.2 logging console ...................................................................................................... 5-85.3.3 logging buffered ..................................................................................................... 5-95.3.4 logging monitor....................................................................................................... 5-95.3.5 logging host .......................................................................................................... 5-105.3.6 show logging ........................................................................................................ 5-11

User Manual – Command Reference (Volume 1)Versatile Routing Platform

Chapter 1EXEC Interface Commands

1-1

Chapter 1 EXEC Interface Commands

EXEC interface commands include: configure controller e1 crypto disable enable exit help interface language logic-channel route-map router show history vpdn-group

1.1 configure

Use the configure command to enter the global configuration mode from the privilegeduser mode.

configure

Command Mode

Privileged user mode

Example

! Enter the global configuration mode.

Quidway#configure

! Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with command exit.

Quidway(config)#

Related Command

exit

1.2 controller e1

Use the controller e1 command to enter the cE1/PRI interface configuration modefrom the global configuration mode.

controller e1 number



1-2

Syntax Description

number Interface number of cE1/PRI, increasing from 0 in order.

Command Mode

Global configuration mode

Example

! Enter the cE1/PRI interface configuration mode.

Quidway(config)# controller e1 0

Quidway(config-if-E0)#

Related Command

exit

1.3 crypto

Use the crypto command to create and enter the corresponding security configuration.Use the no form of this command to delete the corresponding security configuration.

crypto { ike key | ipsec transform | map }

no crypto { ike key | ipsec transform | map }

Syntax Description

ike policy IKE policy configuration.

ipsec transform IPSec transform configuration.

map Map configuration.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The crypto configuration command is used to create and enter the correspondingencryption configuration. For its specific use and parameters, consult the reference forthe IKE and IPSec configuration commands.

Example

Example 1:

! Enter the configuration for IKE policy 10.

Quidway(config)#crypto ike policy 10

Quidway(config-crypto-ike-policy-10)#

Example 2:



1-3

! Enter the map configuration whose name is newmap1 and sequence number is 100,and that negotiates via isakmp.

Quidway(config)#crypto map newmap1 100 isakmp

Quidway(config-crypto-map-map1-100)#

Example 3:

! Enter the IPSec transform-set configuration whose name is newtrans1.

Quidway(config)# crypto ipsec transform newtrans1

Quidway(config-crypto-transform-newtrans1)#

Related Command

exit

1.4 disable

Use the disable command to return from the privileged user mode to user mode.

disable

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When a privileged user is to be away from the terminal for a long time, he shouldexecute the disable command to restore user mode, or execute the exit command toexit so as to prevent unauthorized access. For the same reason, if you have not madeany input from the keyboard in 10 minutes, the system will automatically disconnectwith you.

Example

! Return from the privileged user mode to user mode.

Quidway#disable

Quidway>

Related Command

enable, exit

1.5 enable

Use the enable command to enter the privileged user mode from the user mode.

enable



1-4

Command Mode

User mode

Usage Guideline

To prevent unauthorized access, it is necessary to authenticate the user before heenters the privileged user mode from the user mode, that is, he needs to enter theprivileged user password. In order to prevent the password input by you from beingdisplayed on the screen for sake of security, if you input the correct password in threeattempts, you will enter the privileged user mode; otherwise the original commandmode will remain unchanged.

Example

! Enter the privileged user mode from the user mode.

Quidway>enablePassword:Quidway#

Related Command

disable, enable password, exit

1.6 exit

Use the exit command to return to a lower-level mode from the current mode. If you arein user mode and privileged user mode, then you would exit the configuration.

exit

Command Mode

User mode, privileged user mode, global configuration mode, routing protocolconfiguration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode,virtual interface configuration mode, VPDN group configuration mode, etc.

Usage Guideline

There are four levels of command mode, which respectively are, from low to high:

User mode, Privileged user mode, global configuration mode, routing protocolconfiguration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode,virtual interface configuration mode, and VPDN configuration mode.

By executing the exit command, you can return to a lower-level user mode from ahigher-level command mode. Switching is allowed between configuration modes of thesame level. In addition, you can directly return to the privileged user mode from twohigher-level command modes.

Example

! Return from the Ethernet Interface configuration mode to the global configurationmode.



1-5

Quidway(config-if-ethernet0)# exit

Quidway(config)#

Related Command

configure, router, interface, controller, logical-channel, vpdn-group, router-map

1.7 help

Use the help command to show the help information.

help

Command Mode

User mode, privileged user mode, global configuration mode, routing protocolconfiguration mode, interface configuration mode, logic channel configuration mode,virtual interface configuration mode, VPDN group configuration mode, etc.

Usage Guideline

VRP1.4 provides online help at any point. And the help command shows theinformation about the whole help system, including full help and partial help. You canenter a question mark “?” to obtain online help.

Example

Quidway(config)# helpHelp may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be empty. Two styles of help are provided: 1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument ( e.g. 'show ?' ) and describes each possible argument. 2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want to know what arguments match the input ( e.g. 'show sn?' ).

1.8 interface

Use the interface command to create/enter the interface configuration mode. Use theno form of this command to delete some customized logic interfaces (Dialer, Virtual-template, etc.) and sub-interfaces.

interface { { async | ethernet | serial | bri | dialer | tunnel | virtual-template |vpntunnel } interface-number | interface-name }

no interface { { async | ethernet | serial | bri | dialer | tunnel | virtual-template |vpntunnel } interface-number | interface-name }

Syntax Description

1) Interface typeVRP1.4 now supports the following types:



1-6

Async Ethernet serial bri dialer tunnel virtual-template vpntunnel

Async, Ethernet, serial and bri are all physical interfaces, and dialer, tunnel,virtual-template, and vpntunnel are logic interfaces. Serial interfaces include asyncserial interfaces, sync serial interfaces, and cE1/PRI interfaces (channel-group andpri-group). Some of the physical interfaces support sub-interfaces.2) Interface-numberThe above five types are numbered respectively, each beginning from 0:

On different models of routers, physical routers have their own numbers. As for thechannel-group cE1/PRI interface, its number is e1-interface-number : channel-group-number;

As for the pri-group cE1/PRI interface, its number is e1-interface-number : 15;

As for other logic interfaces like Dialer or Virtual-template, they are numbered based onthe order where they have been created;

As for a sub-interface, its number is physical-interface-number. Sub-interface-number.

3) Interface-nameAfter learning the interface numbering rules, you can know interface naming. Theformat for an interface name: interface type plus interface number. For example,Ethernet0 stands for Ethernet interface number 0; Serial0.1 stands for sub-interfacenumber 1 of Serial0; Serial3: 2 stands for channel-group 2 in cE1/PRI interface 3.

To make input easy for you, interface types can be abbreviated (only a few beginningletters are used abbreviations as long as they do not conflict with other interface types),for example, Ethernet0 can be abbreviated as e0, and Serial0.1 can be abbreviated ass0.1.

Command Mode

Global configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode, interface configurationmode, logic channel configuration mode, virtual interface configuration mode, VPDNgroup configuration mode, etc.

Usage Guideline

The interface command can be executed to enter the physical interface configurationmode, or create logic interfaces according to user requirements. In all theconfigurations at the same level as the interface configuration mode, the interfacecommand can be used to switch to the corresponding interface configuration mode.

Example

Example 1:

! Enter the Ethernet interface configuration mode from the global configuration mode.

Quidway(config)# interface ethernet 0



1-7

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)#

Example 2:

! Enter the Serial0.1 configuration from the Ethernet0 configuration.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# interface serial0.1

Quidway(config-if-Serial0.1)#

Related Command

exit

1.9 language

Switch the language mode of command line interface

language

Default

English

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For the convenience of demestic users, VRP EXEC mode interface supports not onlyEnglish mode but also Chinese mode.

Exmaple

! Switch English mode to Chinese mode.

Quidway(config)# languageCurrent Language : English Will You switch language mode ?(Y/N)y

You have changed the language mode .

1.10 logic-channel

Use the logic-channel command to enter the related logic channel configurationmode.

logic-channel logic-channel-number

Syntax Description

logic-channel-number Logic channel number, ranging 1 to 255.



1-8

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Logic channels are mainly used in the backup center. The logic channels in the VRP1.4backup center include X.25 and frame relay virtual circuits, or even a Dialer Map at thedialup interface. Logic channels can serve as main interfaces or backup interfaces forthe backup center.

Example

! Enter the configuration on logic channel 0.

Quidway(config)# logic-channel 0

Quidway(config-logic-channel0)#

Related Command

exit, dialer map, x25 map, frame-relay map

1.11 route-map

To create a route-map or enter the router-map configuration, use the route-mapcommand. Use the no form of this command to delete corresponding route-map.

route-map route-map-name { permit | deny } seq-number

no route-map route-map-name { permit | deny } seq-number

Syntax Description

route-map-name Route map name.

seq-number Sequence number.

Command Mode


Example

Quidway(config)# route-map test permit10

1.12 router

Use the router command to enter the corresponding routing protocol configuration.Use the no form of this command to disable the corresponding routing protocol.

router ospf [ enable ]

no router ospf enable



1-9

router rip

no router rip

router igrp

no router igrp

router bgp as-number

no router bgp

Syntax Description

The router ospf command can be used to enter the OSPF configuration. The routerospf enable command is used to enable OSPF and enter the OSPF configuration.

as-number Autonomous system number, ranging 0 to 65535.

Default

No dynamic routing protocol enabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When multiple dynamic routing protocols run concurrently, please pay attention to therouting management policy of the system.

Example

! Enter the OSPF configuration in the global configuration mode.

Quidway(config)# router ospf

Quidway(config-router-ospf)#

Related Command

exit

1.13 vpdn-group

To create a VPDN group or enter the VPDN group configuration, use the vpdn-groupcommand. Use the no form of this command to delete the corresponding VPDN group.

vpdn-group group-number

no vpdn-group [ group-number ]

Syntax Description

group-number VPDN group number, ranging 1 to 3000.



1-10

Default

No VPDN group created.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The VPDN group is used for the VPN and L2TP configurations. In this mode, theTunnel working parameter can be configured.

Example

! Create VPDN group 1 and enter its configuration.

Quidway(config)# vpdn-group 1

Quidway(config-vpdn-group1)#

Related Command

exit

1.14 show history

To show the history command input by the current user, use the show historycommand.

show history

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

VRP1.4 saves 10 history commands at maximum. You can access them through theUp and Down keys on the keyboard.

Example

! Show the history command input by the current user.

Quidway# show historyenableconfigureinterface serial 0ip address 129.102.0.1 255.255.0.0exitexit


Chapter 2System Management Commands

2-1

Chapter 2 System Management Commands

2.1 File Management Commands

File management commands include: configfile copy download config erase first-config get write show configfile show running-config show startup-config

2.1.1 configfile

To select the storage media for the current configuration file, use the configfilecommand.

configfile { flash | nvram }

Syntax Description

flash Storage media for the current configuration file is Flash.

nvram Storage media for the current configuration file is NVRAM.

Default

NVRAM as the default storage media when Flash and NVRAM co-exist.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The Quidway series of routers has Flash and NVRAM for saving configuration files, sothe configfile command is used to select one of them as the currently valid media. TheRelated Command for read/write configuration files are intended for operations on thestorage media currently selected. For example, after the configfile NVRAM commandis executed, the write command is executed; now the configuration file will be saved toNVRAM instead of Flash. Before saving or erasing the configuration file, you can usethe show configfile command to show the storage media for the current configurationfile.



2-2

Example

! Select NVRAM as the storage media for configuration file.

Quidway(config)# configfile NVRAM

Related Command

erase, download config, show running-config, show startup-config, showconfigfile.

2.1.2 copy

To download the configuration file from the local router to the TFTP server, use thecopy command.

copy tftp_server_ip_address file_name

Syntax Description

tftp_server_ip_address The IP address of the TFTP server, in the format of A.B.C.D.

file_name Filename, in the format of 8.3.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to download the configuration file by the filename of file_name inthe local router’s Flash or NVRAM to the TFTP server whose address istftp_server_ip_address.

Error numbers returned by this command indicate the results of the commandexecution, which are explained as follows:

0x00: successful.

0x01: memory insufficient.

0x02: setup request packet failed.

0x03: setup socket failed.

0x04: bundle socket failed.

0x05: transmission invalid.

0x06: partial file transferred.

0x10: error packet received.

0x07: the operation of sending file to the server failed

0x0b: socket setup failed

0x0c: the operation of reading file failed



2-3

0x0d: host name resolution failed

0x0e: the operation of opening local file failed

0x0f: parameter invalid

0x10: error packet received

0x11: synchronization failed.

0x12: the operation of writing configuration file failed.

0x13: the operation of reading configuration file failed.

0x14: config file written by two or more users simultaneously

0x15: memory allocation failed.

0x16: file oversize

0x18: the operation of writing file failed

Example

! Download the configuration file from the local router to the TFTP server.

Quidway# copy 10.110.1.1 sys.cfgstart uploading config file...Errno=0x0end uploading.In the above information, “Errno” stands for the result of command execution. Forexample, 0x0 means success, otherwise, failure.

Related Command

get

2.1.3 download config

To download configuration file via the Console of the router, use the download configcommand.

download config

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command should be used under the guidance of a technical support engineer, andthe configuration file of the router should be edited off-line by technical people or seniormaintenance personnel.

While editing the configuration file, please note:

The configuration file for the router is composed of commands.



2-4

Pressing the Enter key or adding a new line sign indicates the end of a command. Donot press the Enter key or add a new line sign in the middle of a command line.

An explanatory line can be inserted between two command lines and begins with“!”.

A whole configuration file uses End as its terminator.You load the configuration file via the Send Binary File function of the terminal simulator.Before sending a configuration file to the router, please make sure:

Execute the download config command, and the router is waiting for loading. Now inthe terminal simulator’s window, you can see that the router regularly sends the Ccharacter to the terminal simulator.

Xmodem/CRC is set as the binary transmission protocol for the terminal simulator. The correct configuration file transfer has been selected.

After loaded successfully, the configuration file can not take effect immediately; it takeseffect only after the router is rebooted. If you have downloaded the wrong configurationfile, the system will initialize via the default parameters after the rebooting. You canerase the wrong configuration file with the erase command or just reload the file.

In the Quidway series of routers, the configuration file loaded will be stored in the mediaspecified by the configfile command, NVRAM by default.

Example

!Download configuration file via the Console of the router.

Quidway# download configDo you want really download the config.ini?(Y/N)yChange protocol to Xmodem then send the selected file.Downloading...

Download completed.Writing to flash memory...Write completed, please reboot the router.

Related Command

write, erase, show running-config, show startup-config

2.1.4 erase

Use the erase command to erase the routers’ configuration file in Flash or NVRAM.

erase

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Be careful when executing this command. You’d better execute it under the guidance ofa technical support engineer.

This command is normally used in the following situations:



2-5

When the router software has been upgraded, the configuration file in Flash may notmatch the new-version software. Now you can erase the old configuration file with theerase command.

A used router is applied in a new environment, and the existing configuration file doesnot meet the new environment requirement. Now it is necessary to re-configure therouter. You can make the reconfiguration after erasing the original configuration file.

In the Quidway series of routers, the configuration file stored in the media specified bythe configfile command will be erased.

When the router is powered on and initializing, if the system detects no configurationfile in Flash, then it will initialize the router via the default parameters.

Example

! Erase the routers’ configuration file in Flash or NVRAM.

Quidway# eraseThis will erase the configuration in the flash memory. The router configurations will be erased to reconfigure! Are you sure?[Y/N]y

Related Command

first-config, write, download config, show running-config, show startup-config

2.1.5 first-config

Set the flag bit to enter the initial setup.

first-config { set | clear }

Syntax Description

set: set the flag bit.

clear: delete the flag bit.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

first-config set is used to set the flag bit of the initial setup. After the flag bit is set, therouter will delete the config files in Flash or NVRAM before the system enters setupmode in case of power off and reset. The operation is similar to erase command.

first-config clear is used to cancel the setting of the flag bit.

Do not use this command before write command, which also cancels the setting of theflag bit.

Use this command cautiously, preferably under the guidance of technical supportpersonnel.



2-6

Example

! set the flag bit to enter setup.

Quidway# first-config set

! Reset the router to enter setup mode.

Quidway# rebootWARNING: System will REBOOT! Continue ?[Y/N]ySystem is now rebooting, please wait

****************************************** * * * Quidway Series Router Bootrom, V4.25 * * * ******************************************

Copyright(C) 1999-2001 by HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD. Compiled at 09:06:32 , Jun 13 2001.

Now testing memory...OK! 32M bytes DRAM 8192k bytes flash memory

Press ENTER key to get start when you see ATS0=1.

System now is starting... ATS0=1Quidway>setup --- System Configuration Dialog ---

Default settings are in square brackets '[]', if you do not change the default settings, you may input enter. And Ctrl-C can cancel at any time without saving.

Continue with configuration dialog? [yes]:

Related Command

erase, write, show running-config, show startup-config

2.1.6 get

Use the get command to download the configuration file in the TFTP server to Flash orNVRAM in the local router.

get tftp_server_ip_address file_name

Syntax Description

tftp_server_ip_address The IP address of the TFTP server, in the format of A.B.C.D.

file_name Filename, in the format of 8.3.

Command Mode




2-7

Usage Guideline

This command is used to download the configuration by the name of file_name in theTFTP whose address is tftp_server_ip_address to the local router’s Flash or NVRAM.

Error numbers returned by this command indicate the results of the commandexecution, which are explained as follows:

0x00: successful.

0x01: memory insufficient.

0x02: setup request packet failed.

0x03: setup socket failed.

0x04: bundle socket failed.

0x05: transmission invalid.

0x06: partial file transferred.

0x10: error packet received.

0x07: the operation of sending file to the server failed

0x0b: socket setup failed

0x0c: the operation of reading file failed

0x0d: host name resolution failed

0x0e: the operation of opening local file failed

0x0f: parameter invalid

0x10: error packet received

0x11: synchronization failed.

0x12: the operation of writing configuration file failed.

0x13: the operation of reading configuration file failed.

0x14: config file written by two or more users simultaneously

0x15: memory allocation failed.

0x16: file oversize

0x18: the operation of writing file failed

Example

! Download the configuration file in the TFTP server to the local router.

Quidway# get 10.110.1.1 sys.cfgstart downloading config file...errno=0x0end downloading.



2-8

In the above information, “Errno” stands for the result of command execution. Forexample, 0x0 stands for success, otherwise, failure.

Related Command

copy

2.1.7 write

Use the write command to save (write) the current configuration file to Flash orNVRAM.

write

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When a set of configurations have been completed and have implemented theintended functions, the current configuration files should be saved to Flash or NVRAM(in he Quidway series of routers, they will be saved to the storage media specified bythe configfile command).

Example

! Write the current configuration file to Flash or NVRAM.

Quidway# write

Related Command

erase, download config, show running-config, show startup-config

2.1.8 show configfile

Use the show configfile command to show the storage media type for the currentconfiguration file.

show configfile

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to show the storage media type for the current configuration fileoperation.

Example

! Show the storage media type for the current configuration file.



2-9

Quidway(config)# show configfileflash

Related Command

erase, download config, show running-config, show startup-config, configfile.

2.1.9 show running-config

To show the currently valid configuration parameters of the router, use the showrunning-config command.

show running-config

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When you have completed a set of configurations, it is necessary to check if they arecorrect. You can execute the show running-config command to check the currentlyvalid parameter. If some parameters you already configured are not yet valid, they willnot be shown. For example, if X.25 is encapsulated at a certain interface link layer, thenyou can now configure the PPP parameter at this interface. But when executing theshow running-config command, you will not see any PPP configuration information atthis interface.

Some currently valid configuration parameters that are the same as the default runningparameters will not be shown.

Example

! Show the currently valid configuration parameters of the router.

Quidway# show running-config! loghost 129.9.191.240 firewall enable snmp-server contact Mr.Wang-Tel:3306 snmp-server traps enable snmp-server host 129.102.149.23 snmp-server location telephone-closet,3rd-flood host liuzhenhua 129.102.157.55

host server 129.102.157.55

! interface Ethernet0 ip address 129.102.100.141 255.255.0.0 ! interface Serial0 baudrate 9600 encapsulation ppp ppp chap host quidway ppp pap sent-username quidway password 0 quidway ! interface Serial1 encapsulation ppp



2-10

ppp chap host quidway ppp pap sent-username quidway password 0 quidway ! interface Serial2 flowcontrol normal encapsulation ppp ppp chap host quidway ppp pap sent-username quidway password 0 quidway ! end

Related Command

write, erase, download config, show startup-config

2.1.10 show startup-config

Use the show startup-config command to show the router’s startup configuration filein Flash, that is, the configuration file used when the router is powered on and rebootednext time.

show startup-config

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If the router fails to work normally after powered on, you can execute the showstartup-config command to check the router’s startup configuration file (in theQuidway series of routers, the startup configuration file is stored in the media specifiedby the configfile command).

Example

! Show the router’s startup configuration file in Flash.

Quidway# show startup-config

Related Command

write, erase, download config, show running-config

2.2 FTP Server Configuration Commands

FTP server configuration commands include: ftp-server config-name ftp-server enable ftp-server system-name ftp-server timeout show ftp



2-11

2.2.1 ftp-server config-name

To set the configuration filename, use the ftp-server config-name command.

ftp-server config-name config-name

Syntax Description

config-name Configuration filename.

Default

config

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The configuration filename is set for uploading the configuration file. Only when thename of the configuration file to be uploaded is the same as that set in the router can itbe correctly uploaded.

Example

! Specify the name of the configuration file as “quidway”.

Quidway(config)# ftp-server config-name quidway

2.2.2 ftp-server enable

To enable the FTP server, use the ftp-server enable command. Use the no form ofthis command to disable the FTP server.

ftp-server enable

no ftp-server enable

Default

Ftp server disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command can be used to enable or disable the FTP server easily so as tosafeguard the router against attack by any unknown user.



2-12

Example

! Disable the FTP server.

Quidway(config)# no ftp-server enable

2.2.3 ftp-server system-name

To set the name of the system program file, use the ftp-server system-namecommand.

ftp-server system-name system-name

Syntax Description

system-name System program filename.

Default

system

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The system program filename is set to upload the system program file. Only when thename of the system program file to be uploaded is the same as that set in the router,can it be uploaded correctly.

Example

! Set the system program filename to “program”.

Quidway(config)# ftp-server config-name program

2.2.4 ftp-server timeout

To set the connection timeout, use the ftp-server timeout command.

ftp-server timeout second

Syntax Description

second Timeout value, in seconds.

Default

600 seconds.

Command Mode




2-13

Usage Guideline

When you logs into the FTP server, you set up a connection with it. If the connection isdisconnected abnormally or you disconnect abnormally, the FTP will not be able toknow this, so it still maintains the connection. Therefore the connection timeout is usedto avoid such a situation. When the connection has not carried out any commandexchange in a certain period of time, the FTP server will deem the connection as failed,and then disconnect the connection.

Example

! Set the connection timeout to 500 seconds.

Quidway(config)# ftp-server timeout 500

2.2.5 show ftp-server

Use the show ftp-server command to show the parameters of the current FTP server.

show ftp-server

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the FTP server parameters have been set, this command can be used to showthe results.

Example

! Show the results of FTP server parameter settings.

Quidway(config)# show ftp-serverConfigName configSystemName systemTimeOut 600

2.3 Basic System Management Commands

Basic system management commands include: clock set hostname reboot setup show clock show hostname show queue show version

2.3.1 clock set

Use the clock set command to set the current date and clock of the router.



2-14

clock set hour:minute:second day month year

Syntax Description

hour:minute:second Current clock. hour, ranging 1 to 24; minute and second, ranging1 to 60.

year/month/day Current date. year, ranging 1997 to 2097, month, ranging 1 to 12, day,ranging 1 to 31.

Default

If the router is not yet equipped with a hardware real-time clock, the default clock is0:0:0 1/1/1997 when the system is booted. If equipped with a real-time clock, thesystem will read the clock value when booted, and use it for setting the system time.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When powered off, the Quidway series of routers can not continue to keep clock, so it isnecessary to set the current date and clock for the router in a rigorous applicationenvironment requiring the absolute clock and date.

Example

! Set the current date and clock of the router to 0:0:0 Jan. 1st, 2000.

Quidway# clock set 0:0:0 1 1 2000

Related Command

show clock

2.3.2 hostname

Use the hostname command to set the hostname of the router.

hostname hostname

Syntax Description

hostname Hostname of the router, represented in a character string.

Default

Quidway

Command Mode




2-15

Usage Guideline

Modifying the hostname of the router will affect the prompts at the command lineinterface. If the router’s hostname is Quidway, then its prompt in privileged user modeis Quidway#.

Example

! Set the hostname of the router to “QuidwayR2501”.

Quidway# hostname QuidwayR2501

QuidwayR2501#

Related Command

show hostname

2.3.3 reboot

Use the reboot command to reboot the router.

reboot

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The function of this command is similar to first powering off the router and thenrestarting it. But when the router is maintained remotely, it is not necessary to rebootthe router where the router is located; instead, you can directly reboot it remotely.

Generally, do not use this command, for it will lead to network failure in a short time. Inaddition, it is necessary to ensure if the router’s configuration file needs to be saved.

Example

! Reboot the router.

Quidway# rebootwarnings: System will REBOOT! Continue?[Y/N]ySystem is now rebooting, please wait.

2.3.4 setup

Use the setup command to guide you interactively to configure the basic parametersnecessary for the running of the router.

setup



2-16

Default

When a certain parameter is to be configured, if this parameter is found alreadyconfigured, then its current value is shown as a default value. And you can directlypress Enter without modifying it.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When you power on and boots the router for the first time, the system will automaticallyexecute the setup command to guide you in configuring the parameters necessary forthe running of the router. These parameters include:

Router’s hostname Privileged user password SNMP parameter Selecting such network protocols as IP and IPX IP addresses and IPX network numbers at the interfaces

In addition, the privileged user can execute the setup command at any point.

Example

Quidway# setup--- System Configuration Dialog ---

Default settings are in square brackets '[]', if you do not change the default settings, you may input enter. And Ctrl-C can cancel at any time without saving.

Continue with configuration dialog? [yes]:yFirstly, would you like to see the current interface summary? [yes]:y

Interface IP-Address OK? Status ProtocolEthernet0 129.102.100.141 yes down upSerial0 yes up downSerial1 yes up downSerial2 yes up downConfiguring global parameters:Enter host name [Quidway]:Enter enable password []: Configure SNMP Network Management? [YES]:Community string []:publicConfigure IP? [yes]:Configure IPX? [NO]:y

Configuring interface Ethernet0:Is this interface in use? [YES]:Configure IP on this interface? [YES]:IP address for this interface [129.102.100.141]:Netmask [255.255.0.0]:Class B network is 129.102.0.0.IP address is 129.102.100.141, netmask is 255.255.0.0.Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]:yIPX network number for this interface [1]:

Configuring interface Serial0:Is this interface in use? [YES]:Configure IP on this interface? [NO]:



2-17

Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]:

Configuring interface Serial1:Is this interface in use? [YES]:Configure IP on this interface? [NO]:Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]:

Configuring interface Serial2:Is this interface in use? [YES]:Configure IP on this interface? [NO]:Configure IPX on this interface? [NO]:

The following configuration was created:hostname Quidwayenable passwordsnmp-server community roipx routinginterface Ethernet0no shutdownip address 129.102.100.141 255.255.0.0ipx network 1interface Serial0no shutdownno ip addressno ipx networkinterface Serial1no shutdownno ip addressno ipx networkinterface Serial2no shutdownno ip addressno ipx networkendUse this configuration? [yes/no]:Now writing the configuration to flash memory.Write the running config to flash memory successfully.Please reboot the router.

2.3.5 show clock

To show the current date and clock of the system, use the show clock command.

show clock

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

You can execute this command to find out if the system time is correct. If the systemtime is incorrect, you can adjust it.

Example

Quidway# show clock

8:18:28 Jan 6 1999



2-18

Related Command

clock set

2.3.6 show hostname

To show the router’s hostname, use the show hostname command.

show hostname

Command Mode

User mode and Privileged user mode

Example

Quidway# show hostnameQuidway

Related Command

hostname

2.3.7 show queueing

To show the queue in the system, use the show queue command.

show queueing

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command shows the current length, limit length, dropped packets, queue headand tail, etc. of receive and send queues, IP receive queue, ARP receive queue, andIPX receive queue, at the interfaces. This command can be generally used by thetechnical support engineer in fault diagnosis.

Example

Quidway# show queueingInterface Dialer1: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0Interface Ethernet0: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 2, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0



2-19

Queue head --> 0x7de480, Queue tail --> 0x7de400Interface LoopBack0: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0Interface Serial0: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0Interface Serial1: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0Interface Serial2: Send queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0 Receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0ip receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0arp receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 50 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0ipx receive queue: Current length : 0, Queue limit length 75 , Drops : 0 Queue head --> 0x0, Queue tail --> 0x0

Related Command

ifquelen ip, ifquelen arp

2.3.8 show version

To show the system version information, use the show version command.

show version

Command Mode

Privileged user mode and User mode

Usage Guideline

Different versions have different functions. By querying the version information, you willknow the features supported by the software.

Example

Quidway# show version



2-20

Quidway Router Software Version 3.0-Mar 17 1999-03:31:59Copyright (c) 1997-2000 SHENZHEN HUAWEI TECH CO.,LTD.hardware version is 1.0


Chapter 3Terminal Service Configuration Commands

3-1

Chapter 3 Terminal Service ConfigurationCommands

3.1 Terminal Service Attribute Configuration Commands

Terminal service attribute configuration commands include: exec-timeout

3.1.1 exec-timeout

To start the function of the timed disconnection with the terminal client, use the exec-timeout command. Use the no form of this command to shut down the function.

exec-timeout

no EXEC-timeout

Default

Timed disconnection enabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For a Console client, the disconnection timeout is 3 minutes. For a dummy client, thedisconnection timeout is 10 minutes. You can shut down this function via the noexec-timeout command so the terminal client will never be disconnected.

Example

! Shut down the function of timed disconnection with the terminal user.

Quidway# no exec-timeout

3.2 Telnet Service Configuration Commands

Telnet service configuration commands include: terminal telnet refuse-negotiation telnet show client

3.2.1 terminal telnet refuse-negotiation

To disable the telnet client negotiation function, use the terminal telnet refuse-negotiation command. Use the no form of this command to enable this function.



3-2

terminal telnet refuse-negotiation

no terminal telnet refuse-negotiation

Default

Telnet client negotiation disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For the router’s Reverse Telnet terminal service, it is sometimes necessary to set up aconnection via the TCP client. And the client data are directly transparently transferredto the router via the transmission layer interface to communicate directly with theasynchronous port corresponding to the port specified by the TCP connection. You candisable the telnet negotiation function for Reverse Telnet terminal service via theterminal telnet refuse-negotiation command.

This command is only effective for QuidwayR1600/2500/2500E/4000/4000E series ofrouters.

Example

! Disable the telnet negotiation function for the Reverse Telnet terminal.

Quidway(config)# terminal telnet refuse-negotiation

3.2.2 telnet

To log onto other routers from the current router via the Telnet tool, use the telnetcommand.

telnet host-ip-address [ service-port ]

Syntax Description

host-ip-address IP address of the remote router, in the dotted decimal format.

service-port TCP port number via which the router provides the Telnet service.Ranging 0 to 65535.

Default

Default Telnet port number is 23.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

By executing the telnet command, you can easily log from a router onto another forremote management.



3-3

If the destination IP address is the IP address of the local router, and the specified portnumber is 2000+n (n is the sequence number of the asynchronous interface), then youcan communicate with the external device (like an external Modem) via thecorresponding asynchronous port.

Example

! Log from the current router Quidway1 to another router Quidway2 (IP address:129.102.0.1)

Quidway# telnet 129.102.0.1Trying hostaddress...Service port is 23Connected to hostaddressQuidway2>

Related Command

show client, show tcp brief

3.2.3 show client

To show all the clients of the router, use the show client command.

show client

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If the router suddenly starts to work abnormally or its working parameters are modified,now this command can be used to show if other privileged clients are modifying thesystem configuration.

The information shown via this command includes the user ID allocated by the systemand the IP address for this client.

Example

! Show all the clients of the router.

Quidway# show client Client ID IP Address 2555904 129.102.1.92

Related Command

telnet, show tcp brief

3.3 Terminal Server Configuration Commands

Terminal server configuration commands include: async mode tty autocommand



3-4

tty logo-print tty menu-key tty-server app tty-server enable tty-server source-ip tty test-key show tty show tty-server

3.3.1 async mode tty

To configure the physical terminal and virtual terminal of the access server of dumbterminal, use the async mode tty command. Use the no form of this command tocancel the existing configurations.

async mode tty tty-number vty-number app-number

no async mode tty [ vty-number ]

Syntax Description

tty-number Physical terminal number.

vty-number Virtual terminal number on the physical terminal.

app-number Application program number.

Command Mode

Asynchronous serial interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

The physical terminal number corresponds with the asynchronous serial port on therouter. The access server of dumb terminal numbers all the physical terminalsconnected the computer in unification.

On the access server of dumb terminal, a maximum of 4 virtual terminals can beconfigured for each physical terminal. The virtual terminal corresponds with theapplication program of the host computer to be connected.

Example

! Set the physical terminal number of the access server of dumb terminal correspondingwith the asynchronous serial interface Async 1 to 1. Set the virtual terminal number to 0and the application program number of the UNIX program used to 0.

Quidway(config-if-Async1)# async mode tty 1 0 0

3.3.2 autocommand

Use the autocommand command to enable the automatic execution of the commandwhen the interface operates in the interactive mode. Use the no form of this commandto disable the automatic execution of the command.

autocommand command



3-5

no autocommand command

Syntax Description

command A valid command string.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After the user logs in to the router through dumb terminal mode, some of the specifiedcommands will be executed automatically and the user will enter into the givenoperating mode.

Example

! Enable automatic execution of telnet command on the asynchronous serial interfaceAsync 1.

Quidway(config-if-Async1)# autocommand telnet 10.110.164.44

Related Command

async mode interactive

3.3.3 tty logo-print

To display the logo image of terminal server, use the tty logo-print command. Use theno form of this command to cancel display.

tty logo-print

no tty logo-print

Default

The system will not display the logo image of Huawei terminal server.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

You can choose to display or not display the logo image of the Huawei terminal serverby this command. This command can be configured, when and only when theasynchronous serial port configured has started the terminal server function.

Example

! Set up the asynchronous serial interface Async 0 to display the logo image of Huaweiterminal server.

Quidway(config-if-Async0)# tty logo-print



3-6

3.3.4 tty menu-key

Use the tty menu-key command to set up the hot key to be used to start up the menufunction of the dumb terminal server. Use the no form of this command to cancel thesetup.

tty menu-key ascii-code

no tty menu-key

Syntax Description

ascii-code The ASCII value corresponded with the hot key. The hot key is used toactivate the menu.

Default

No hot key will be set up.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After one asynchronous serial interface has started up the function of the access serverof dumb terminal, you can define the hot key to activate the menu with this command,to start up the function of the menu of the dumb terminal server. Moreover, you can usethe hot key to conduct dynamic switchover between multiple application programs.

After the hot key to activate the function of menu of the dumb terminal is set up, theoperation of the terminal is likely to be abnormal, since the ASCII value of the hot keyset up is probably same as the uplink data of some of the terminals. In this case, youneed to re-specify the ASCII value of the hot key or cancel the setup of the hot key.

Example

! Set up the key to activate the menu to XXX on the asynchronous serial interfaceAsync 0.

Quidway(config-if-async0)# tty menu-key XXX

3.3.5 tty-server app

To specify the application program on the UNIX host computer end, use the tty-serverapp command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the appointment.

tty-server app app-number ip-address port [ app-name ]

no tty-server app app-number

Syntax Description

app-number Number of the application program on the UNIX host computer end. Oneaccess server of dumb terminal can be configured with a maximum of 4 applicationprograms. Moreover any of the number of the application program should duplicate.



3-7

ip-address The IP address of the UNIX host computer where the application programis on.

port TCP port number of the application program on the UNIX host computer, ranging1024 to 65535.

app-name Name of the application program, with no more than 18 English letters.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The uplink of the access server of dumb terminal corresponds with the applicationprogram of UNIX host computer. Multiple application programs can be one on UNIXhost computer or distribute over multiple UNIX host computers. The access server ofdumb terminal can number all the application programs in unification and multiplex toone TCP link the data flow of all the dumb terminals to one application program.

All the settings of the virtue terminals corresponding with the application program willbe canceled automatically, once the specification of the application program of the hostcomputer is cancelled.

Example

! Specify the application program “counter”. Its number is 0, so the IP address on theUNIX host computer is 1.1.1.1 and the TCP port number is 2000.

Quidway(config)# tty-server app 0 1.1.1.1 2000 counter

Related Command

async mode tty, show tty-server

3.3.6 tty-server enable

To enable the access server of dumb terminal, use the tty-server enable command.Use the no form of this command to shut down the access server of dumb terminal.

tty-server enable

no tty-server enable

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Please enable it before you use and configure the access server of dumb terminal.

When the access server of dumb terminal is enabled, and the application program ofthe host computer, physical terminal and the virtual terminal are correctly configured,the corresponding asynchronous port on the router will change to UP state, after thedumb terminal is powered on. And the access server of dumb terminal will establishTCP connection with the application program of the host computer automatically, and



3-8

the dumb terminal will enter into the log-on interface of the application program. Afterthe access server of dumb terminal is shut down, the configuration of the application ofthe host computer, physical terminal and virtual terminal will be retained, not becanceled automatically.

Example

! Enable the access server of dumb terminal.

Quidway(config)# tty-server enable

Related Command

show tty-server

3.3.7 tty-server source-ip

To bind TCP source address, use the tty-server source-ip command. Use the no formof this command to cancel the binding of TCP source address.

tty-server source-ip app-number ip-address

no tty-server source-ip app-number

Syntax Description

app-number Number of the application program, used to identify the IP address of TCPconnection to be bounds.

ip-address IP address to be bound.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Sometimes when multiple dumb terminals multiplex one TCP connection to establishrelationships with the application programs of the host computer by the access serverof dumb terminal, the real IP address in the TCP connection of the uplink of the accessserver of dumb terminal needs to be hidden up and set up to other IP address asrequired, out of consideration of security and other things. Generally, the binding ofsource address chooses the interface not used of the router, such as dial interface.

In addition, the binding of TCP source address should be set up before the TCPconnection is established. Otherwise, it’s invalid.

Example

! Bind the TCP source address of the application program 0 to 27.222.48.73.

Quidway(config)# tty-server source-ip 0 27.222.48.73

Related Command

show tty-server



3-9

3.3.8 tty test-key

Use the tty test-key command to activate test function of terminal. Use the no form ofthis command to cancel the test function of the terminal.

tty test-key ascii-code

no tty test-key

Syntax Description

ascii-code The ASCII value corresponding with the hot key. The hot key is used toactivate test of the terminal.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After the hot key of terminal test is configured on one asynchronous serial port, you canpress hot key on the terminal and “Terminal test OK!” will be displayed on the dumbterminal, if the connection between the dumb terminal and the router is correct.

After the test function of the terminal is activated, the operation of the terminal is likelyto be abnormal, since the ASCII value of the hot key is probably same as the uplinkdata of some of the terminals. In this case, you need to re-specify the ASCII value of thehot key or cancel the test function of the terminal.

Example

! On the asynchronous serial interface Async 0, set up the key to activate terminal testto XXX.

Quidway(config-if-async0)# tty test-key XXX

3.3.9 show tty

To show the relevant information of the physical terminal and virtual terminal, use theshow tty command.

show tty

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

By using this command, the state information of the physical terminal and the virtualterminal can be shown on the access server of the dumb terminal, thus you can monitorand maintain the access server of the dumb terminal.

Example

! Show information of physical terminal and virtual terminal.



3-10

Quidway# show tty INTERFACE TTY_ID VTY_ID APP_ID TTY_STATE VTY_STATE Async0 0 0 0 ok setThe explanation of the information shown is as follows:

The number of the physical terminal configured on the asynchronous serial port Async0 is 0. The number of the virtual terminal configured on the physical terminal is 0. Thenumber of the application program of the host computer corresponding with the virtualterminal is 0. The physical terminal is powered on and is connected with the accessserver of the dumb terminal. The virtual terminal is configured.

Related Command

async mode tty, tty-server app, tty-server enable, show tty-server

3.3.10 show tty-server

To show the relevant information of the application program on the UNIX host computerside, use the show tty-server command.

show tty-server

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

With this command, the state and configuration information of the application programof the host computer, the physical terminal and the virtual terminal can be displayed onthe access server of the dumb terminal, thus you can monitor and maintain the accessserver of the dumb terminal.

Example

! Show the information of the application program.

Quidway# show tty-server APP_ID HOST_IP PORT STATE APP_NAME 0 1.1.1.1 2000 linked counterThe explanation of the information shown is as follows:

The application program numbered 0 of the UNIX host computer is on the UNIX hostcomputer whose IP address is 1.1.1.1; the number of the TCP port selected and used is2000; the access server of dumb terminal has established TCP connection with theprogram; the name of the application program is “counter”.

Related Command

tty-server app, tty-server enable, tty-server source-ip, show tty

3.4 PRI Terminal Configuration Commands

PRI Terminal configuration commands include:



3-11

pri-interactive pri-autocommand

3.4.1 pri-interactive

To enable the PRI terminal functions, use the pri-interactive command. Use the noform of this command to disable the PRI terminal function.

pri-interactive

no pri-interactive

Command Mode

PRI interface configuration mode

Default

PRI terminal function disabled.

Usage Guideline

Before using this command, please first use the pri-group command at the cE1/PRIinterface to bind the time slots.

This command is only effective for QuidwayR4000/4000E series of routers,

Example

! Enable the PRI terminal functions at the interface Serail2:15.

Quidway(config-if-Serial2:15)# pri-interactive

Related Command

pri-group, pri-autocommand

3.4.2 pri-autocommand

To configure a command so that it can be automatically executed after the login of thePRI terminal client, use the pri-autocommand command. Use the no form of thiscommand to cancel the configuration of automatic execution of commands.

pri-autocommand { command } [ parameters ] ...

no pri-autocommand { command } [ parameters ] ...

Syntax Description

command Any executable command of the router.

parameters Command parameters, which can be many.

Default

No automatically executed commands configured.



3-12

Command Mode

PRI interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

This command will not take effect until the pri-interactive command is used to enablethe PRI mute terminal functions.

This command is only effective for QuidwayR4000/4000E series of routers.

Example

! Specify the telnet 192.168.0.1 command automatically executed at the InterfaceSerial2:15.

Quidway(config-if-Serial2:15)# pri-autocommand telnet 192.168.0.1

Related Command

pri-interactive

3.5 X.25 PAD configuration commands

X.25 PAD configuration commands include: login pad pad x29 invite clear-time show x25 pad debug pad

3.5.1 login pad

To start the AAA authentication of the X.25 PAD Server end, use the login padcommand. To cancel the authentication, use the no form of this command.

login pad

no login pad

Default

By default, AAA authentication of the Server end is not set.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When X.25 PAD is used for remote configuration, if it is necessary to authenticate theuser efficiency, the user command can be used to set the valid X.25 PAD remote loginuser at the Server end. Then this command is used to start the AAA authentication atthe Server end.



3-13

As to the detailed description of the meaning, parameter and usage of the usercommand, please refer to the “Security Configuration” part of this manual.

Example

! The following example sets an X.25 PAD remote user at the local end.Quidway(config)# user paduser service-type exec password 7 padpass! The following example starts the AAA authentication of the local end to the X.25 PADuser.Quidway(config)# login pad

Related Command

user, pad

3.5.2 pad

To initiate the X.25 PAD calling to the Server end with specified X.121 address, use thepad command.

pad x.121-address

Parameter Description

x.121-address The X.121 address of the Server end of X.25 PAD. Please refer toITU-T Recommendation X.121 and related RFC files for the X.121 address format.

Command Mode

Common user mode, privileged mode

Usage Guideline

On the router interconnected through the X.25 network, this command can be used toinitiate the X.25 PAD calling to log in the remote Server end. Then the remote routercan be configured.

It must be ensured that both ends support the X.25 PAD features. Otherwise the callingcannot succeed.

After successful calling, the party initiating the calling (Client end) will enter theconfiguration interface of the called party (Server end).

Example

! The following example initiates the X.25 PAD calling to QuidwayB at the Server endwith the X.121 address of 123456 from QuidwayA. After successful calling, log inQuidwayB.QuidwayA# pad 123456Trying 123456...OpenQuidwayB#

Related Command

login pad, show x25 pad, debug pad



3-14

3.5.3 x29 inviteclear-time

To set the response time of the Server end of X.25 PAD to X.29 Invite Clear messages,use the x29 inviteclear-time command.

x29 inviteclear-time time


time Response time in second, and the value ranges from 5 to 2147483.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the Server end of X.25 PAD for some reason (For example: the Client end sendsthe exit request or it is needed to release link resources etc.) sends link clearancemessage Invite Clear to the Client end, the Server end will wait for the response fromthe Client end. If the Client end fails to respond within the specified time, the Server endwill clear the link positively.

Example

! The following example sets the response time of the local end to the X.29 Invite Clearmessage to 1000 seconds.Quidway(config)# x29 inviteclear-time 1000

3.5.4 show x25 pad

To display the related information of X.25 PAD, use the show x25 pad command.

show x25 pad

Command Mode

Privileged mode

Usage Guideline

This command can be used to display such information as message transmission ofX.25 PAD and X.3 parameter setting etc., so as to maintain X.25 PAD and performfault diagnosis and troubleshooting.

Example

! The following example displays the related information of the local X.25 PAD.Quidway# show x25 padconnection 1 to host 123456PAD0:Total input: 12, control 3, bytes 35, QueuedIn: 1 of 56.Total output: 10, control 3, bytes 64, QueuedOut: 2 of 56.State: 3, Last error: 1ParamsIn: 1:0, 2:0, 3:0, 4:0, 5:0, 6:0, 7:0, 8:0, 9:0, 10:0, 11:0, 12:0, 13:0, 14:0, 15:0,



3-15

16:0, 17:0, 18:0, 19:0, 20:0, 21:0, 22:0,ParamsOut: 1:1, 2:0, 3:2, 4:1, 5:1, 6:0, 7:21, 8:0, 9:1, 10:0, 11:14, 12:1, 13:0, 14:0, 15:0, 16:127, 17:21, 18:18, 19:0, 20:0, 21:0, 22:0,The above displayed information includes: message transmission information Totalinput/output, QueuedIn/Out, State, Last error and X.3 parameter setting information(Paramsln/out). The Paramsln information refers to the X.3 parameter informationreceived by the local end, and the ParamsOut information refers to the X.3 informationissued by the local end.

Related Command

pad

3.5.5 debug pad

To enable the debugging at all levels, use the debug pad command. To disable thelevel-corresponding debugging, use the no form of this command.

debug pad [ packet | error | all ]

no debug pad [ packet | error | all ]


packet Enable the packet debugging.

error Enable the error debugging.

all Enable all the debugging.

Default

By default, the debugging is disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command can be used to enable the X.25 PAD debugging at all levels. The X.25PAD related information will be displayed along with the configuration information of theend being configured (Server end). Based on this information, the user can monitor andmaintain X.25 PAD as well as performing fault diagnosis and troubleshooting.

Note:Please use this command under the guidance of the technical supporting personnel.

Related Command

pad



3-16

3.6 Rlogin configuration command

Rlogin configuration includes the following command: rlogin

3.6.1 rlogin

To set up Rlogin connection, use the rlogin command. To shut down Rloginconnection, use the exit command.

rlogin host-ip-address [{-l | / user} username ] [ debug [ debug-level ] ]

exit

Command Mode



host-ip-address The IP address of the UNIX host to be logged in.

-l Specify the remote login user name to come into compatibility with standard BSDUNIX Rlogin. If the keyword is not used, the system will adopt the router’s local user asthe login user name.

/ user Specify remote login user name. If the keyword parameter is not used, thesystem will adopt the router’s local user as the login user name.

username The remote login user name. This user must have registered on the UNIXhost, otherwise the remote login will fail.

debug Turn on the debugging information switch of the Rlogin protocol of the system.

debug-level Specify the output level of the debugging information. The value range is0~4. The larger the value, the higher will the level be. When debug-level=4, the systemwill display all the debugging information.

Usage Guideline

Rlogin (Client) function can make the digital or analogue user terminal that has loggedin the router via the dummy terminal access function log in the UNIX host by usingRlogin protocol. This command can be used to establish the Rlogin connection to theUNIX host.

Example

! The following example establishes user root on the router. After authentication, theuser can log on the UNIX host legally.Quidway# rlogin 1.1.254.78 -l rootTrying 1.1.254.78 ... Password:Last successful login for root: Thu Sep 06 15:14:15 2001 on ttyp0 Lastunsuccessful login for root: Thu Sep 06 14:22:35 2001 on ttyp0

SCO OpenServer(TM) Release 5 (C) 1976-1998 The Santa Cruz Operation, Inc. (C)1980-1994 Microsoft Corporation Allrights reserved.



3-17

For complete copyright credits, enter "copyrights" at the command prompt.you have mail Terminaltype is vt100 #If the exit command is inputted now, the Rlogin connection can be shut down.# exit connection closed


Chapter 4SNMP Configuration Commands

4-1

Chapter 4 SNMP Configuration Commands

4.1 SNMP Configuration Commands

SNMP configuration commands include: snmp-server community snmp-server contact snmp-server enable traps snmp-server host snmp-server location snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1 show snmp

4.1.1 snmp-server community

To set the community name and access authority, use the snmp-server communitycommand.

snmp-server community {ro | rw} community-name

Use the no form of this command to restore the default community name according todifferent access authority.

no snmp-server community { ro | rw }

Syntax Description

community-name Communication name, represented in a string.

ro and rw Access authority: read-only and read-write.

Default

The system deems the community name with read-only authority as public, and thecommunity name with read-write authority as private.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

SNMP V1 adopts the community name-based authentication scheme: the SNMPpackets not matching the community name recognized by the device. Differentcommunities can have either of read-only access authority and read-write accessauthority. Communities with read-only authority can query device information, andthose with write and read authority can make configurations for the device.



4-2

Example

! Set the public community as a community with read-only authority, and the privatecommunity as a community with read-write authority.

Quidway(config)# snmp-server community ro public

Quidway(config)# snmp-server community rw private

4.1.2 snmp-server contact

To set the IDs and contact methods of the network administrators, use the snmp-server contact command. Use the no form of this command to restore the default IDand contact method.

snmp-server contact sysContact

no snmp-server location

Syntax Description

syscontact The IDs and contact methods of network administrators, represented in acharacter string.

Default

SysAdmin

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When there is trouble with the network, you can contact the network administratoraccording to this information.

Example

! Set the IDs and contact methods of the network administrators as“sysadmin:XXX(Tel:1234)”.

Quidway(config)# snmp-server contact sysadmin:XXX(Tel:1234)

4.1.3 snmp-server enable traps

To enable SNMP Trap, use the snmp-server enable traps command. Use the no formof this command to disable SNMP Trap.

snmp-server enable traps

no snmp-server enable traps

Default

snmp-server enable traps is disabled.



4-3

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

SNMP Trap is information not requested that the managed equipment initiate to send tothe NMS for reporting some urgent, important events.

Example

! Disable snmp-server enable traps.

Quidway(config)# no snmp-server enable traps

Related Command

snmp-server host

4.1.4 snmp-server host

To set the IP address of the destination host for SNMP Trap, use the snmp-serverhost command.

snmp-server host host-ip-address

Syntax Description

host-ip-address IP address of the destination host for SNMP Trap, in the dotteddecimal format.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After the system is enabled to send SNMP Trap, you should specify the IP address ofthe destination host.

Example

! Set the IP address of the destination host for SNMP Trap to 129.102.0.1.

Quidway(config)# snmp-server host 129.102.0.1

Related Command

snmp-server enable traps

4.1.5 snmp-server location

To set the location of the router, use the snmp-server location command. Use the noform of this command to restore the default location.



4-4

snmp-server location syslocation

no snmp-server location

Syntax Description

syslocation Location of the router, represented as a character string.

default

Beijin

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

To locate the router quickly, network administrators can use this command to show thelocation of the router.

Example

! Set the location of the router.

Quidway(config)# snmp-server location beijing-huawei-401

4.1.6 snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1

To enable the router to send Authentication Trap, use the snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1 command. Use the no form of this command to make therouter stop sending Authentication Trap.

snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1

no snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1

Default

Authentication Trap sending disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Authentication Trap is one kind of SNMP Trap. If Authentication Trap sending isenabled, then when the managed equipment receives a request containing an incorrectcommunity name, it can send Authentication Trap to the NMS.

Example

! Disable the Authentication Trap sending.

Quidway(config)# no snmp-server trap-authentication snmpv1



4-5

Related Command

snmp-server enable traps, snmp-server host

4.1.7 show snmp

Use the show snmp command to show the statistics about the SNMP Agent packetsinput and output.

show snmp

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The following table shows the meanings of the fields in SNMP Agent packets input andoutput.

Table FC-4-1 Statistics about SNMP packets

Information shown MeaningUnknown community name Unidentifiable community nameIllegal operation for community name supplied Illegal operationEncoding errors Encoding errorsGet-request PDUs Get-request PDUsGet-next PDUs Get-next PDUsSet-request PDUs Set-request PDUsToo big errors Errors too big to generate any response PDUNo such name errors Specified name errors not existingBad values errors Errors with bad valuesGeneral errors General errorsGet-response PDUs Get-response PDUsSNMP trap PDUs SNMP trap PDUs

Example

! Show the statistics about the SNMP Agent packets input and output.

Quidway# show snmp70 SNMP packets input.0 Unknown community name.0 Illegal operation for community name supplied.0 Encoding errors.10 Get-request PDUs.60 Get-next PDUs.0 Set-request PDUs.

73 SNMP packets output.0 Too big errors.4 No such name errors.0 Bad values errors.0 General errors.70 Get-response PDUs.3 SNMP trap PDUs.



4-6

4.2 RMON configuration command

RMON configuration commands include: rmon promiscuous clear rmon statistics show rmon statistics

4.2.1 rmon promiscuous

To enable the RMON statistics function of the Ethernet interface, use the no form ofthis command to disable the RMON statistics function.

rmon promiscuous

no rmon promiscuous

Default

Disable the RMON statistics function.

Command Mode

Ethernet interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

The router can collect the original data needed by RMON only when RMON statisticsfunction at the Ethernet interface is enabled. Otherwise the statistics data can not beviewed via RMON.MIB. If the Ethernet interface is configured with Bridge protocol, therouter can provide RMON with the statistic of the frame whose destination is anotherrouter.

Example

! Enable the RMON statistics function

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# rmon promiscuous

Related Command

clear rmon statistics, show rmon statistics

4.2.2 clear rmon statistics

To clear the entire RMON statistic data of the Ethernet interface, use the clear rmonstatistics command.

clear rmon statistics

Command Mode




4-7

Usage Guideline

This command is used to delete the statistical data after RMON statistics function of theEthernet interface is enabled.

Example

! Clear all the RMON statistical data of the Ethernet interface.

Quidway# clear rmon statistics

Related Command

rmon promiscuous, show rmon statistics

4.2.3 show rmon statistics

To show the RMON statistical results of Ethernet interface, use show rmon statisticscommand.

show rmon statistics

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to show RMON statistical results of the Ethernet interface withenabled RMON statistics function.

Example

! Show RMON statistical results of the Ethernet interface.

Quidway#show rmon statistics

Related Command

rmon promiscuous, clear rmon statistics


Chapter 5Maintenance and Debugging Tool Commands

5-1

Chapter 5 Maintenance and Debugging ToolCommands

5.1 System Debugging Commands

System debug commands include: debug show debugging

5.1.1 debug

Use the debug command to turn on the system debug switch. Use the no form of thiscommand to turn off this switch.

debug { all | { protocol-name | function-name } [ debug-option ] }

no debug { all | { protocol-name | function-name } [ debug-option ] }

Syntax Description

all Turning on/off all debug switches.

Default

All debug switches turned off.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

VRP1.4 provides a vast array of debug functions, which are generally intended fortechnical support engineers and senior maintenance personnel.

When the debug switch is turned on, a large volume of debug information will begenerated, leading to deterioration of system efficiency. In particular, when the debugall command is executed to turn on all the debug switches, this may result in collapse inthe network system. So the debug all command is not recommended. On the contrary,the no debug all command will greatly convenience you, for it enables you to turn offall the debug switches at one single time, and you do not have to turn them off on aone-by-one basis.

In addition, any terminal user turning on or off debug switches will affect the output ofdebug information at the other user terminals.

As for the link-layer protocols, their debug switches can be controlled based on theirinterfaces. This effectively avoids the interference from a large amount of redundantinformation and expedites network fault diagnosis and location.



5-2

In VRP1.3 and the subsequent versions, the output debug information and othervarious prompt information is managed via Syslog in a unified manner. So we will notprovide the monitor and the unmonitored. In their stead, you need to turn on thecorresponding Syslog switch for debug information. First, you must use the logging oncommand to start the Syslog function; then, according to the terminal types you usedcurrently, use the logging console or logging monitor command to turn on the debuginformation output switch. On the Console, please use the logging console debuggingcommand; at the Telnet terminal or dummy terminal, please use the logging monitordebugging command. For detail, please consult the Syslog configuration part.

Example

Example 1:

! Enable the IP Packet debugging.

Quidway# debug ip packetIP packet debugging switch is on.Example 2:

! Enable the PPP packet debugging at serial0.

Quidway# debug ppp packet interface serial0PPP packet debugging switch is on.

Related Command

show debugging, logging on, logging console, logging monitor

5.1.2 show debugging

To show the debug switches already turned on, use the show debugging command.

show debugging

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

To check which debug switches have been turned on, you can execute the showdebugging command. Debug switches are shown in two parts: a) link-layer debugswitches already turned on that are shown according to the order of the interfaces,which are valid to interfaces only; b) global debug switches.

Example

! Show the debug switches already turned on.

Quidway#show debugginginterface serial0:PPP packet debugging switch is on.global debugging switch :ip packet debugging switch is on



5-3

Related Command

debug

5.2 Network Test Tool Commands

Network test tool commands include: ping ping ipx tracert

5.2.1 ping

To check if the IP network connection and host are reachable, use the ping command.

ping [ ip ] [ -R ] [ -d ] [ -n ] [ -q ] [ -r ] [ -v ] [ -c count ] [ -p pattern] [ -s packetsize ] [ -ttimeout] host

Syntax Description

-c Count of times that the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets is sent, ranging1~4294967295.

-d Set socket to DEBUG mode.

-n Use the host parameter as the IP address without domain name resolution.

-p Pattern, ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet filling bit, in the hex format. For example,-p ff fills all packets with ff.

-q No other detailed information but statistics is shown.

-R Recording routes.

-r Transmitting Echo-Request packets directly to the connected network without routeselection.

-s The size of the ECHO-REQUEST packet (exclusive of the IP and ICMP headers),counting in bytes.

-t Timeout after the ECHO-REQUEST is sent, the timeout waiting for ECHO-RESPONSE 的, counting in ms.

-v Showing other non-ECHO-RESPONSE ICMP packets.

host Name or IP address of the destination host.

Default

If not specified, the above parameters are as follows: Count of times that the ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent: 5 times. Socket: non-DEBUG mode. Host: regarded as an IP address first; if it is not an IP address, then it needs to

undergo domain name resolution. Filling method: starting from 0x01, and gradually increasing until 0x09; then repeat. All information including statistics are shown. No route recorded.



5-4

ECHO-REQUEST is sent through route selection. The packet size of the ECHO-REQUEST packet is 56 bytes. The timeout for waiting for the ECHO-RESPONSE packet is 2000ms. Non-ECHO-RESPONSE ICMP packets not shown.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

While the ping is executed, the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent to thedestination. If network connection to the destination works normally, then after thedestination host receives the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST, it will acknowledge receipt ofthe ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet to the source host.

The ping command is used to test if network connection is faulty or if the network hasline quality trouble. Its output information includes:

Reply of the destination host to every ECHO-REQUEST packet. If no reply packetis received within the timeout limit, “Request timeout” will be output, otherwise thesystem will show the count of bytes, sequence number, TTL reply time, etc. of thereply packet.

Final statistics, including the count of packets sent, count of reply packet received,percentage of packets unanswered, and minimum, maximum and average valuesof the reply time.

If the network transmits at a low speed, the reply packet timeout value can be increasedappropriately.

Example

! Check if the host whose IP address is 202.38.160.244 is reachable.

Quidway# ping 202.38.160.244ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytesReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=2 ttl=255 time = 2msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=3 ttl=255 time = 1msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=4 ttl=255 time = 3msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=5 ttl=255 time = 2ms--202.38.160.244 ping statistics--5 packets transmitted5 packets received0% packet lossround-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms

Related Command

tracert

5.2.2 ping ipx

To check if IPX network connection and host are reachable, use the ping ipxcommand.

ping ipx [ -n ] [ -v ] N.H.H.H [ count [ , timeout [ , pscketsize ] ] ]



5-5

Syntax Description

-n Standard Novell reply mode used.

-v Showing detailed information.

N.H.H.H Network address of the remote host.

count Times that the IPX ping request packet is sent.

timeout Timeout value waiting for the IPX ping reply packet, counting in seconds.packetsize Size of the IPX ping request packet.

Default

If not specified, the above parameters are as follows: Count of times that the IPX ping request packet is sent: 5 times. Timeout for the IPX ping reply packet: 2s. The size of the IPX ping request packet: 100 bytes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The ping ipx command can be used to test if the IPX network is faulty. The outputinformation includes:

Reply to each IPX ping request packet from the destination. If no reply packet isreceived within the timeout limit, then “!” is output, otherwise “.” is shown.

Final statistics, including the count of packets sent, count of reply packets received,percentage of packets unanswered, the minimum, maximum and average values.

Example

! Check if the host whose IPX address is 2.0.0c91.f61f is reachable.

Quidway# ping ipx 2.0.0c91.f61fPress CTRL_C to breakSending 5, 100-byte IPX Echoes to 2.0.0c91.f61f, timeout is 2 seconds!!!!!--2.0.0c91.f61f IPX ping statistics--5 packets transmitted5 packets received0% packet lossround-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms

5.2.3 tracert

To test if the gateways through which a data packet goes from the source host to thedestination host are unreachable, use the tracert command.

tracert [ -f first_TTL ] [ -m max_TTL ] [ -p port ] [ -q nqueries ] [ -w timeout ] host

Syntax Description

-f To test if the –f switch is correct.

first_TTL Specifies the first TTL, ranging 0 to maximum TTL.



5-6

-m To test if the –m switch is correct.

max_TTL Specifies a maximum TTL, which is more than the initial TTL.

-p To test if the –p switch is correct.

port The port number of the destination host, which is an integer. Generally, you doesnot have to modify this item.

-q To test if the –q switch is correct.

nqueries The count of test data packets sent each time, which is an integer and morethan 0.

-w To test if the –wf switch is correct.

timeout Specifies the timeout value for the IP packet in the second, which is an integerand more than 0.

host IP address of the destination host.

Default

If not specified, the parameters are as follows: first_TTL: 1. max_TTL: 30. port: 33434. nqueries: 3. timeout: 5s.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Process of executing the tracert command is as follows.

First, send a data packet whose TTL is 1, so the first hop feeds back a ICMP errormessage indicating that this data packet can not be sent (for TTL timeout). Then thisdata packet is retransmitted with TTL as 2, again the second hop feeds a TTL timeoutmessage. This process goes on and on until the packet reaches the destination. Thepurpose of executing these processes is to record the source address for each ICMPTTL timeout message, providing the path through which an IP packet goes beforereaching the destination.

After identifying a fault with the network through the ping command, you can locate thefault via the tracert command.

The information output through the tracert command includes the IP addresses of allthe gateways through which an IP packet goes before reaching the destination. If agateway is timeout, then output “***”.

It is mainly used to check if network connection is reachable, and analyze where thenetwork is faulty.

Example

! Test if the gateways through which a data packet goes from the source host to thedestination host whose IP address is 18.26.0.115 are unreachable.



5-7

Quidway# tracert 18.26.0.115traceroute to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms12 * * *13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms14 * * *15 * * *16 * * *17 * * *18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms

5.3 Log Commands

Log commands include: logging on logging console logging buffered logging monitor logging host show logging

5.3.1 logging on

To start the log function, use the logging on command. Use the no form of thiscommand to shut down the log function.

logging on

no logging on

Default

Log function shut down.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Only after the log system is started via this log command can log information be outputto the Console, Telnet terminal, dummy terminal, buffer in the router, and log host.

Example

! Shut down the log function.

Quidway(config)# no logging on



5-8

Related Command

show logging

5.3.2 logging console

To turn on the log output switch in the Console direction, use the logging consolecommand. Use the no form of this command to shut down the log output in the Consoledirection.

logging console [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors |warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ] ]

no logging console [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors |warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ] ]

Default

The language for display is English and,

The seriousness-level threshold is informational and information is not filtered basedon the module.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to start (or close) log output in the Console direction and set thecorresponding control parameter.

Example

Example 1:

! Enable output of log information, where the seriousness level of the PPP moduleranges from emergencies to debugging.

Quidway(config)# logging console Chinese debugging filter ppp

Example 2:

!Disable the module-based filter function, that is, enable output of log information fromall the modules.

Quidway(config)# no logging console filter

Related Command

show logging, show running-config



5-9

5.3.3 logging buffered

To turn on the log output switch in the buffer direction, use the logging bufferedcommand. Use the no form of this command to disable log output in the bufferdirection.

logging buffered [ size ] [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical |errors | warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1facility2 ] ]

no logging buffered [ size ] [ English | Chinese ] [ emergencies | alerts | critical |errors | warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1facility2 ] ]

Default

The buffer size is 200, language for display is English, seriousness-level threshold isinformational, and no information filtering based on the module.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

A buffer is allocated in the Quidway router to save a certain amount of log information.When the count of logs exceeds the buffer size, the initial part of log information will becovered.

Example

! Configure the log parameter in the buffer direction, only enabling the saving of loginformation whose seriousness levels range from emergencies to errors in the buffer.

Quidway(config)# logging buffered errors

Related Command

show logging , show running-config

5.3.4 logging monitor

To turn off the log output switch in the Console direction, use the logging monitorcommand. Use the no form of this command to disable the log output in the Consoledirection.

logging monitor [ all ] [ English | Chinese] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors |warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ] ]

no logging monitor [ all ] [ English | Chinese] [ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors |warnings | notifications | informational | debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ] ]

Default

The language for display is English.



5-10

The seriousness-level threshold is informational.

Information is not filtered based on the module.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to configure log output to the remote Telnet terminal, which canbe used for remote debug. The parameter all is used in no logging monitor all only,indicating that the log system is disabled to send log information to any Telnet ordummy terminal. no logging monitor indicates that the log system is disabled to sendlog information to the local terminal.

Example

Example 1:

! Enable output of hdlc module information from the current telnet terminal or dummyterminal.

Quidway(config)# logging monitor filter hdlc Chinese

Example 2:

! Disable log output in the telnet or dummy terminal.

Quidway(config)# no logging monitor all

Related Command

show logging , show running-config

5.3.5 logging host

To turn on the log output switch in the log host direction, use the logging host command.Use the no form of this command to disable the log output in the log host direction.

logging host < 0-9 > ip-address [ local0 | | local7 ] [ English | Chinese ][ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational |debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ] ]

no logging host < 0-9 > ip-address [ local0 | | local7 ] [ English | Chinese ][ emergencies | alerts | critical | errors | warnings | notifications | informational |debugging ] [ filter [ facility1 facility2 ] ]

Default

The facility name is “local7”.

The language for display is English.

The seriousness-level threshold is informational.

Information is not filtered based on the module.



5-11

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to configure the log host. The log system can send log packetsto the hosts according to the configuration list, with a protocol number of 514. Whileusing this command, try not to configure too many log hosts so as to avoid affecting therouter’s performance negatively.

Example

! Use a computer whose IP address is 10.110.200.200, and turn on the switchoutputting log information to it.

Quidway(config)# logging host 0 10.110.200.200 filter hdlc English informational

Related Command

show logging, show running-config

5.3.6 show logging

To show the configuration information for the log system or recording the information inthe buffer in the router, use the show logging command.

show logging [ buffered ]

Command Mode

Privileged user mode and global configuration mode

Usage Guideline

show logging is used to show the control parameter of the log system and thestatistics of log packets sent. show logging buffered is used to show the loginformation saved in the buffer in the router.

Example

Example 1:

! Show the current log configuration information.

Quidway(config)# show logging Syslog logging: enable(0 messages logged,0 messages dropped). Console logging: level debugging,language English,filter off,0 messages logged. Monitor logging: level informational,language English,filter off,0 messages logged. Host logging: HostName IPAddress Facility Severity Filter Language Logged host0 10.110.201.103 local7 informational off English 0 Buffer logging: size 200,level informational,language English,filter off,0 messages logged.Example 2:



5-12

! Show the log information saved in the buffer in the router.

Quidway(config)# show logging buffered%01:19:38-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP O LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State starting, code ConfReq(01), id 21, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 322a0100% Interface Serial2:0 changed state to UP%01:19:40-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP I LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State reqsent, code ConfReq(01), id 6, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 0000d32d%01:19:41-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP O LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State reqsent, code ConfAck(02), id 6, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 0000d32d% Line protocol ip on interface Serial2:0, changed state to UP%01:19:41-PPP-6-DEBUG: Serial2:0 PPP O LCP(c021) Pkt, Len 18 State acksent, code ConfReq(01), id 22, len 14 MRU(1), len 4, val 05dc MagicNumber(5), len 6, val 85670100

Related Command

show running-config

HUAWEI®


02 – Interface Configuration (IC)


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Interface Management Commands ........................................................................... 1-11.1 Interface Management Commands .................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 clear port ................................................................................................................ 1-11.1.2 description .............................................................................................................. 1-21.1.3 flow-interval ............................................................................................................ 1-31.1.4 shutdown ................................................................................................................ 1-41.1.5 show interface ........................................................................................................ 1-5

Chapter 2 Basic Configuration Commands for LAN Interface ................................................ 2-12.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Ethernet Interface .................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 duplex..................................................................................................................... 2-12.1.2 loopback ................................................................................................................. 2-22.1.3 mtu ......................................................................................................................... 2-32.1.4 send-frame-type ..................................................................................................... 2-42.1.5 speed...................................................................................................................... 2-4

Chapter 3 Basic Configuration Commands for WAN Interface ............................................... 3-13.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Serial Interfaces....................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 async mode............................................................................................................ 3-13.1.2 baudrate ................................................................................................................. 3-23.1.3 clock-select............................................................................................................. 3-33.1.4 databits................................................................................................................... 3-53.1.5 detect dsr-dtr .......................................................................................................... 3-53.1.6 flowcontrol .............................................................................................................. 3-63.1.7 invert transmit-clock ............................................................................................... 3-73.1.8 loopback ................................................................................................................. 3-73.1.9 mtu ......................................................................................................................... 3-83.1.10 nrzi-encoding........................................................................................................ 3-93.1.11 parity..................................................................................................................... 3-93.1.12 physical-layer ..................................................................................................... 3-103.1.13 stopbits ............................................................................................................... 3-11

3.2 Basic Configuration Commands for cE1/PRI Interface................................................... 3-113.2.1 channel-group ...................................................................................................... 3-123.2.2 clock ..................................................................................................................... 3-123.2.3 framing ................................................................................................................. 3-133.2.4 linecode ................................................................................................................ 3-143.2.5 loopback ............................................................................................................... 3-143.2.6 pri-group ............................................................................................................... 3-153.2.7 using..................................................................................................................... 3-16


ii

3.2.8 show controller ..................................................................................................... 3-17


Chapter 1Interface Management Commands

1-1

Chapter 1 Interface Management Commands

1.1 Interface Management Commands

Interface management commands applicable to all interfaces include: clear port description flow-interval shutdown show interface

1.1.1 clear port

To clear the statistics of received and transmitted packets for an interface, use the clearport command.

clear port [ interface-type interface-number ]

Syntax Description

interface-type Type of the interface to be configured. It specifies an interface togetherwith interface-number.

interface-number The number of the interface. It specifies an interface together withinterface-type.

Default

If no interface is specified, then the statistics of received and transmitted packets at allthe interfaces will be cleared by default.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In some circumstances, it is necessary to keep statistics of the traffic at a certaininterface. Now it is necessary to clear the existing statistics of received and transmittedpackets at this interface so that new statistics can be kept at this interface.

Example

! Clear the statistics of received and transmitted packets at Serial 0.

Quidway# clear port serial0

Related Command

show interface, flow-interval



1-2

1.1.2 description

To specify a description of an interface, use the description command. Use the noform of this command to restore the default description.

description interface-description

no description

Syntax Description

interface-description Comment or a description to help you remember what is attachedto the interface, up to 80 characters.

Default

Quidway RSeries Router, xxxxxx interface

Command Mode

Interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

This command is only used to identify an interface and does not have special meaningand usage.

Example

! Set the Ethernet interface description as “QuidwayR3680 ethernet interface”.

Quidway# config


Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# description Quidway R3680 ethernet interface

! Press < Ctrl+Z > to return to privilege exec. Show the current configuration and stateof Ethernet interface 0.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)#

Quidway# show interface ethernet 0Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware address is 00-e0-fc-00-00-00 Auto-Negotiation is enabled, Duplex AUTO, Speed AUTO Internet address is 10.111.0.8 255.255.0.0 10.111.255.255 Description: Quidway R3680 ethernet interface IP Sending Frames' Format is Ethernet_II the Maximum Transmission Unit is 1500

! Restore the default configuration of Ethernet interface0

Quidway# config


Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# no description

! Return to privileged exec



1-3

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# exit

Quidway(config)# exit

! Show the current configuration and state of Ethernet interface 0.

Quidway(config)# show interface ethernet 0Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware address is 00-e0-fc-00-00-00 Auto-Negotiation is enabled, Duplex AUTO, Speed AUTO Internet address is 10.111.0.8 255.255.0.0 10.111.255.255 Description: Quidway Router, ethernet interface IP Sending Frames' Format is Ethernet_II the Maximum Transmission Unit is 1500

The function of this command can be seen from the difference among the terminalinformation displayed above.

Related Command

show interface

1.1.3 flow-interval

To set the interval time for counting of traffic at all interfaces, use the flow-intervalcommand.

flow-interval interval-time

Syntax Description

interval-time Time interval for each counting of traffic at all interfaces, in minutes.Ranging 1 to 10 minutes.

Default

5 minutes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The system keeps a statistic of traffic every time interval to calculate traffic per time unitfor sake of reference. This parameter interval-time is needed in other flow controlmethods (including dialer threshold command). This command is used to set the timeinterval for each counting of traffic at all interfaces.

Example

! Set the time interval for counting of traffic at all interfaces to 2 minutes.

Quidway(config)# flow-interval 2



1-4

Related Command

show interface, clear port

1.1.4 shutdown

To disable an interface, use the shutdown command. Use the no form of thiscommand to restart a disabled interface.

shutdown

no shutdown

Default

All interfaces are enabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In some circumstances such as modifying the working parameter of a certain interface,the modification can not take effect immediately. It is necessary to shut down andrestart the interface before the modification can take effect.

Note:This command will directly lead to change in the status of the interface, so be cautious when using thiscommand.

Example

! Shut down Ethernet interface 0

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# shutdown% Interface Ethernet0 is shutdownQuidway(config-if-Ethernet0)#% Interface Ethernet0 changed state to DOWN% Line protocol ip on interface Ethernet0, changed state to DOWN! Reset Ethernet interface 0% Interface Ethernet0 is resetQuidway(config-if-Ethernet0)#% Interface Ethernet0 changed state to UP% Line protocol ip on interface Ethernet0, changed state to UP

Related Command

show interface



1-5

1.1.5 show interface

To display the statistics of an interface, use the show interface command.

show interface interface-type interface-number

Syntax Description

interface-type Type of the interface to be configured. It specifies an interface togetherwith interface-number.

interface-number The number of the interface. It specifies an interface together withinterface-type.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If this command was used, such following information can be shown: The physical status and protocol status of the interface Physical features of the interface (sync/async, DTE/DCE, clock selection, external

cable, etc.) IP address of the interface The run states, statistics, etc. of the link-layer protocols encapsulated at the

interface Statistics of input and output packets at the interface

You will use the show interfaces command frequently while configuring andmonitoring devices, and you can keep statistics of traffic and perform interfacediagnosis based on such information.

Example

! Display the statistics of Serial 0 (with PPP encapsulated).

Quidway# show interface serial 0Serial0 is up, line protocol is up physical layer is synchronous interface is DTE, clock is DTECLK1, cable type is V35 Internet address is 10.3.0.158 255.255.255.252 Encapsulation is PPP LCP opened, IPCP opened, IPXCP disabled Output queue 30/0, 33081 drops; Input queue 30/1, 0 drops. 5 minutes input rate 1288.14 bytes/sec, 4.97 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 3077.11 bytes/sec, 4.94 packets/sec 997074 packets input, 485012871 bytes, 0 no buffers 1825361 packets output, 542976191 bytes, 0 no buffers 1171945 input errors, 437713 CRC, 504161 frame errors 0 overrunners, 230071 aborted sequences, 0 input no buffers

Related Command

clear port


Chapter 2Basic Configuration Commands for LAN Interface

2-1

Chapter 2 Basic Configuration Commands for LANInterface

The LAN interface supported by VRP is an Ethernet interface. So the basicconfiguration commands for the LAN interface refer to those for the Ethernet interface.

2.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Ethernet Interface

The basic configuration commands for the Ethernet interface include: duplex loopback mtu send-frame-type speed

The speed command is valid in the Ethernet interface configuration only. For moreconfiguration commands such as the command for configuring the network protocoladdress, please consult “Network Protocol Configuration” of this manual.

2.1.1 duplex

To configure the operating mode on 10Base-T interface or 100Base-TX fast Ethernetinterface, use the duplex command. Use the no form of this command to return to thedefault setting. The duplex and no duplex command are applicable for the 10Base-TEthernet interface. The duplex {auto | full | half} and no duplex command areapplicable for the 100Base-T fast Ethernet interface.

duplex

no duplex

duplex {auto | full | half}

no duplex

Syntax Description

auto Specifies the auto negotiation capability. The interface automatically operates athalf or full duplex, depending on environmental factors, such as the type of media andtransmission speeds for the peer routers, hubs, and switches used in the networkconfiguration.

full Specifies full-duplex operation.

half Specifies half-duplex operation.

Default

Half duplex for the 10Base-T Ethernet interface.

Duplex auto for the 100Base-T Ethernet interface.



2-2

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For the 10Base-T Ethernet interface, duplex is used to set the Ethernet interface towork in full duplex, and no duplex is used to restore the Ethernet interface to halfduplex which is its default working mode.

For the 100Base-T fast Ethernet interface, duplex full makes it work in full duplex andduplex half makes it work in half duplex while duplex auto sets it to work in duplexauto.

When a router’s Ethernet interface is connected with a hub, it should work in half duplex.And it should work in full duplex when its Ethernet interface is connected with a networkequipment supporting full duplex such as LAN Switch and when the oppositeequipment is set to full duplex.

When the fast Ethernet interface is set to duplex auto, its remote end must work in thesame mode. If this can not be achieved, then use forced setting to ensure consistencyin the working mode.

Executing speed auto after executing duplex {full | half} at the fast Ethernet interfacewill restore the working mode to duplex auto. This will automatically start the duplexauto process and negotiate the speed and working mode.

Example

Example 1:

! Set the 10Base-T Ethernet interface to work in full duplex

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# duplex

Example 2:

! Set the 100Base-T fast Ethernet interface to work in full duplex

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# duplex full

Related Command

speed, show interface

2.1.2 loopback

To diagnose equipment malfunctions between interfaces and devices, use theloopback command. The no form of this command disables the test.

loopback

no loopback

Default

Loopback disabled.



2-3

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The Ethernet interface is set to loopback mode only when some special functions aretested.

Example

! Configures the loopback test on the Ethernet interface.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# loopback

2.1.3 mtu

To adjust the maximum packet size or maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, use themtu command. Use the no form of this command to restore the MTU value to itsoriginal default value.

mtu number

no mtu

Syntax Description

number Desired size of the Ethernet interface’s MTU in bytes. When the Ethernet IIframe type is adopted, it ranges 46 to 1500. When the Ethernet SNAP frame type isadopted, it ranges 46 to 1492.

Default

1500 when Ethernet_II is adopted and,

1492 when Ethernet_SNAP is adopted.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The MTU of the Ethernet interface only affects the fragmentation and reassembling ofIP datagrams on the Ethernet interface.

Example

! Set the MTU of the Ethernet interface to 1492.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# mtu 1492

Related Command

send-frame-type, show interface



2-4

2.1.4 send-frame-type

To set the IP datagram send frame type for the Ethernet interface, use the send-frame-type command. Use the no form of this command to restore to the default IPdatagram send frame type.

send-frame-type { Ethernet_II | Ethernet_SNAP }

no send-frame-type

Syntax Description

Ethernet_II Ethernet_II frame type is adopted.

Ethernet_SNAP Ethernet_SNAP frame type is adopted.

Default

Ethernet_II.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The Ethernet interface of the Quidway series of routers supports the following fourframe types:

Ethernet_II Ethernet_SNAP 802.2 802.3

Ethernet_II and Ethernet_SNAP frame type support IP protocol, and all four typessupport IPX. The Ethernet interface can auto-discriminate the types of frames received,so it can receive packets of multiple frame types concurrently. But it can send packetsof one single frame type at the same time only.

Example

! Set the send frame type for the Ethernet interface to Ethernet_SNAP.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# send-frame-type Ethernet_SNAP

Related Command

mtu, show interface

2.1.5 speed

To configure the speed for a Fast Ethernet interface, use the speed interfaceconfiguration command. Use the no form of this command to restore the defaultoperating speed. This command is only effective for fast Ethernet interface.

speed { auto | 100 | 10 }

no speed



2-5

Syntax Description

10 Set the interface to transmit at 10 Mbps.

100 Set the interface to transmit at 100 Mbps.

auto Turn on the Fast Ethernet auto-negotiation capability. The interface automaticallyoperates at 10 or 100 Mbps depending on environmental factors, such as the type ofmedia and transmission speeds for the peer routers, hubs, and switches used in thenetwork configuration.

Default

Speed auto.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is valid only when configured at the fast Ethernet interface.

While setting the fast Ethernet interface to speed auto, you must set its remote end towork in the same mode. If this can not be achieved, then use forced setting to ensureconsistency in the working mode.

Executing speed auto after executing speed {10 | 100 } at the fast Ethernet interfacewill restore the working mode to speed auto. This will automatically start the duplexauto process and negotiate the speed and working mode.

Example

! Set the fast Ethernet interface to transmit at 10Mbps.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# speed 10

Related Command

duplex, show interface


Chapter 3Basic Configuration Commands for WAN Interface

3-1

Chapter 3 Basic Configuration Commands forWAN Interface

In VRP, WAN interfaces include the serial interfaces, the ISDN BRI interface and thecE1/PRI interface. This chapter describes the basic configuration commands for theserial interface and the cE1/PRI interface only. For those for the ISDN BRI interface,please consult “Dialup Configuration” in this manual.

3.1 Basic Configuration Commands for Serial Interfaces

The basic configuration commands for the serial interfaces include: async mode baudrate clock-select databits detect dsr-dtr enable flowcontrol invert transmit-clock loopback mtu nazi-encoding parity physical-layer stopbits

3.1.1 async mode

To set the working mode of the asynchronous serial interface, use the async modecommand.

async mode { dedicate | interactive | tty }

Syntax Description

dedicate Dedicate mode.

interactive Interactive mode, which is also called the flow mode.

tty Terminal Server mode

Default

Dedicate mode.

Command Mode

Serial interface configuration mode



3-2

Usage Guideline

The asynchronous serial interface can work in either of the following modes:

Dedicate mode. After the setup of a physical connection, the existing link-layer protocolconfiguration parameters are directly used to set up a link.

Interactive mode. After a successful dialup process, both ends of the link interact witheach other. The calling end sends configuration commands to the called end (this canachieve the same effect as by entering configuration commands manually andremotely). The link-layer protocol parameters at the called end are set, and then a linkis set up. This mode applies for man-machine interaction situations such as the dummyend and dialup. This mode can be used together with such commands as modem scriptand autocommand.

Terminal server mode (Tty): when the asynchronous serial port of the router is used interminal server, the number of virtual terminal and physical terminal can be set by thiskeyword and related parameters. For detailed setting, refer to Chapter 3 TerminalService Command in the first fascicle Fundamental Configuration of this manual.

Example

! Set the asynchronous serial interface to work at the interactive mode.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# async mode interactive

Related Command

modem, chat-script, autocommand

3.1.2 baudrate

To set the baud rate for the serial interface, use the baudrate command.

baudrate baudrate

Syntax Description

baudrate Baud rate for the serial port, in bps. Ranging 300 to 115200 bps forasynchronous serial port and 1200 to 2048000 bps for synchronous serial port.

Default

9600bps for the asynchronous serial interface and,

64000bps for the synchronous serial interface.

The synchronous and asynchronous serial modes support different ranges of baudrates, so if the current working mode does not support the original baud rate in the caseof synchronous/asynchronous switching, change the baud rate to the default baud ratein the current working mode.

Command Mode




3-3

Usage Guideline

The asynchronous serial interface supports the following baud rates: 300bps 600bps 1200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps

And the synchronous serial interface supports the following baud rates: 1200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 64000bps 72000bps 115200bps 128000bps 384000bps 2048000bps

In addition, the synchronous serial interface supports different ranges of baud ratesdepending on different physical and electric rules.

V.24DTE/DCE: 1200bps 64000bps V.35DCE/DCE, X.21DTE/DCE, EIA/TIA-449DTE/DCE, and EIA-530DTE /DCE:

1200bps 2048000bpsWhile setting the baud rate for the serial interface, it is necessary to pay attention tosuch factors as the sync/async modes of the serial interface and the electric rules forthe external cable. In addition, it is necessary to note that the baud rate for theasynchronous interface works between the router and the Modem only and thatbetween Modems need to be determined through negotiation between them. So inasynchronous mode, the baud rates of routers at both sides can be set to differentvalues. In synchronous mode, the router at the DCE side decides the baud rate for linetransmission, and you just need to set it at the DCE side.

Example

! Set the baud rate at the serial interface to 115200bps.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# baudrate 115200

Related Command

physical-layer

3.1.3 clock-select

To set the clock selection mode of the synchronous serial interface, use the clock-select command.

clock-select { DCEclk | DTEclk1 | DTEclk2 | DTEclk3 | DTEclk4 }



3-4

Default

DCEclk (providing clock for DTE) for DCE.

DTEclk3 for DTE.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The synchronous serial interface works in two modes: DTE and DCE. Different workingmodes lead to different clock selection methods.

DCE DTE

TxClk

RxClk

Figure IC-3-1 Clock selection on the sync serial interface

TxClk stands for transmitting clock and RxClk for receiving clock.

If the synchronous serial interface acts as the DCE, it is necessary to provide clock forthe opposite DTE. So you need to select DCEclk.

If the synchronous serial interface acts as the DTE and receives the clock provided bythe opposite DCE and because the TX and RX clocks of the synchronous equipmentare independent, the RX clock of the DTE can be either of the TX and RX clocks for theDCE, and the TX clock for the DTE can be either of the DCE’s TX and RX clocks. Sothis gives rise to four clock combinations, that is, four clocks are available for selectionat the DTE side.

These four selection methods are specified as in the following table.

Table IC-3-1 Clock selection methods at the serial interface DTE side

Selection method MeaningsDTEclk1 TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = RxClkDTEclk2 TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = TxClkDTEclk3 TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = TxClkDTEclk4 TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = RxClk

In the above table, TxClk stands for the transmitting clock and RxClk for the receivingclock. The DTE side clock is before “=” while the DCE side clock is after “=”.

Example

! Set the clock selection method for the synchronous serial interface as the DTE toDTEclk2.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# clock-select DTEclk2



3-5

Related Command

physical-layer

3.1.4 databits

To set the data bit length of link layer protocol when asynchronous serial port works ininteractive or terminal server mode, use the databits command.

databits { 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 }

Syntax Description

5 5 data bits

6 6 data bits

7 7 data bits

8 8 data bits

Default

The length of the data bits is set to 8 when asynchronous serial port operates ininteractive mode or terminal server mode.

Command Mode

Asynchronous serial port config mode

Usage Guideline

When the asynchronous serial port works in interactive mode or terminal server mode,the two ends of the link interact after dialing. The link is set up after the router sendsconfiguration command and operating parameters of link layer to terminal. The data bithas to be set if the data bit of the terminal is not 8, as in terminal server.

Example

! Set the data bit to 6

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# databits 6

Related Command

parity, stopbits

3.1.5 detect dsr-dtr

To enable the level detection on the serial interface, use the detect dsr-dtr command.Use the no form of this command to disable this detection.

detect dsr-dtr

no detect dsr-dtr



3-6

Default

Level detection disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If no detect dsr-dtr is set, then the system will only check if the serial interface isconnected with the external cable, and will automatically report to the user the UP andDOWN states of the serial interface. If detect dsr-dtr is set, then the system will notonly check if the serial interface is connected with the external cable, but also detect theDSR signal (it is necessary to detect the DCD signal when the serial interface works insync mode). Only when this signal is valid, will the system determine this serialinterface is UP, otherwise it will determine that the interface is DOWN.

Example

! Disable the level detection at the serial interface.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# no detect dsr-dtr

3.1.6 flowcontrol

To set the flowcontrol method of the asynchronous interface, use the flowcontrolcommand.

flowcontrol { normal | auto }

Syntax Description

Please refer to the “Usage Guideline” below.

Default

auto method for the asynchronous serial interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the serial interface sets up a link in interactive mode, there are two flow controlmethods – hardware flow control and software flow control.

In Hardware flow control, data sending on the asynchronous serial port is controlled byhardware signal. While sending data, the serial interface auto-detects the CTS signal. Itwill normally send the data when a CTS signal is detected; otherwise it stops sendingthe CTS signal. In software flow control, data sending on the asynchronous serial portis controlled by software signal. On receipt of the flow control character XOFF (0x13),the async serial interface will shut down data sending on local interface; on receipt ofthe flow control character XON (0x11), it will start data sending of local interface.



3-7

If the flow control method is set to normal, the asynchronous serial interface will onlystart software flow control. If the flow control method is set to auto, the interface willstart hardware flow control and software flow control.

Example

! Set the flowcontrol method of the asynchronous serial interface to normal.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# flowcontrol normal

Related Command

physical-layer

3.1.7 invert transmit-clock

To enable the invert transmit clock on the synchronous serial interface at the DTE side,use the invert transmit-clock command. Use the no form of this command to disablethe invert transmit-clock.

invert transmit-clock

no invert transmit-clock

Default

Invert transmit-clock disabled when the synchronous serial interface acts as the DTEside equipment.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In some circumstances, the transmit clock on the serial interface of the DTE side isinverted to eliminate the delay for half a clock cycle. This command is only valid forsome clock signals provided by some special DCE. The transmit clock should not beinverted for normal applications.

Example

! Invert the transmit clock on the DTE side serial interface.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# invert transmit-clock

Related Command

physical-layer, clock-select

3.1.8 loopback

To allow loopback on Ethernet interface, use the loopback command. The no form ofthis command disables the test.

loopback



3-8

no loopback

Default

Loopback disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The serial interface is set to have loopback test only when some special functions aretested.

Example

! Configures the loopback test on the serial interface.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# loopback

3.1.9 mtu

To adjust the maximum packet size or maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of theserial interface, use the mtu command. Use the no form of this command to restore theMTU value to its original default value.

mtu number

no mtu

Syntax Description

number Desired size of the serial interface’s mtu which is counted in bytes. Ranging128 to 1500 with default value being 1500.

Default

1500 bytes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The MTU at the serial interface affects the fragmentation and reassembling of IPdatagrams on this interface.

Example

! Set the MTU of the serial interface to 1200.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# mtu 1200



3-9

3.1.10 nrzi-encoding

Use the nrzi-encoding command to enable NRZI (non-return-to-zero inverted) line-coding format. Use the no form of this command to enable NRZ (non-return-to-zero)line-coding format.

nrzi-encoding

no nrzi-encoding

Default

NRZ line-coding format.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

There are two line-coding formats: NRZI and NRZ.

Example

! Configure synchronous serial interface for NRZI coding.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# nrzi-encoding

3.1.11 parity

Set the checking method of link layer protocol on asynchronous serial port underinteractive or terminal server mode.

parity { even | mark | none | odd | space }

Syntax Description

even Even parity.

mark Mark parity.

none No parity.

odd Odd parity.

space Space parity.

Default

No parity.

Command Mode




3-10

Usage Guideline

When the asynchronous serial port works in interactive mode or terminal server mode,the two ends of the link interact after dialing. The link is set up after the router sendsconfiguration command and operating parameters of link layer to the terminal. Theparity method should be set if default none does not apply to the terminal (e.g., interminal server).

Example

! Set the checking method to even parity

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# parity even

Related Command

databits, stopbits

3.1.12 physical-layer

To set the working mode of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface, use thephysical-layer command.

physical-layer { sync | async }

Syntax Description

Please refer to the “Usage Guideline” below.

Default

sync for the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The working mode of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface is decided by itsapplication environment. If the working mode at the synchronous/asynchronous needsto be decided according to its application environment. If external Modems (or ISDN TA)are interconnected through the PSTN (or ISDN), then the async mode should beselected; if external CSU/DSUs are interconnected via the DDN, then the sync modeshould be selected.

Example

! Set the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work as an asynchronous serialinterface.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# physical-layer async



3-11

3.1.13 stopbits

To set the length of the stopbits of link layer protocol on async serial port in interactiveor terminal server mode, use the command stopbits.

stopbits { 1 | 1.5 | 2 }

Syntax Description

1 1 stopbit

1.5 1.5 stopbits

2 2 stopbits

Default

1 stopbit in interactive mode or terminal server mode.

Command Mode

Asynchronous serial port configuration mode

Usage Guideline

When the asynchronous serial port works in interactive mode or terminal server mode,the two ends of the link interact after dialing. The link is set up after the router sendsconfiguration command and operating parameters of link layer to the terminal. Thestopbit length should be set if the default 1 does not apply to the terminal (e.g., interminal server).

Example

! Set the stopbit length of async serial port to 2

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# stopbits 2

Related Command

parity, databits

3.2 Basic Configuration Commands for cE1/PRI Interface

The basic configuration commands for the cE1/PRI interface include: channel-group clock framing linecode loopback pri-group show controller using



3-12

3.2.1 channel-group

To bind the timeslots on the cE1/PRI interface to channel-group, use the channel-group command. Use the no form of this command to cancel the existing binding.

channel-group channel-group timeslots {number | number1-number2} [,number |number1-number2...]

no channel-group channel-group

Syntax Description

channel-group Channel-group number on the cE1/PRI interface, ranging 0 to 30.

number timeslot number, ranging 1 to 31. When the bound timeslot is specified, asingle timeslot number can be specified, or the timeslot range number1-number2 canbe specified.

Default

No channel-group bound.

Command Mode

cE1/PRI interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

In cE1/PRI working mode, the cE1/PRI interface is divided into 32 timeslots physically,corresponding to numbers 0 to 31. All the timeslots except slot 0 can be randomlydivided into channel-groups. Each bound timeslot group acts as an interface. It has thesame logical features as those of the sync interface, supporting such link-layerprotocols as PPP, frame relay, LAPB, and X.25 as well as network protocols like IP andIPX.

Example

! Bind the cE1/PRI interface’s timeslots 1, 2, 5, 10-15 and 18 to channel-group 1.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# channel-group 1 timeslots 1,2,5,10-15,18

Related Command

pri-group

3.2.2 clock

To select the working clock on the cE1/PRI interface, use the clock command. Use theno form of this command to cancel the existing clock setting and restore to the clock bydefault.

clock { DCE | lineclock }

no clock



3-13

Syntax Description

DCE DCE clock.

lineclock DTE clock, which is also called line clock.

Default

DTE clock (also called line clock) for the cE1/PRI interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the cE1/PRI acts as a synchronous interface, it can also work in DTE or DCEmode. So it is necessary to select the line clock. When the cE1/PRI interfaces of tworouters are interconnected, the two ends should work in different modes. When therouter’s cE1/PRI interface is connected with the switch, the switch works in DCE modeand the router in DTE mode. The cE1/PRI interface of the router needs to work in theDTE mode.

Example

! Select the DCE clock as the cE1/PRI interface’s working clock.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# clock DCEf

Related Command

channel-group, pri-group

3.2.3 framing

To set the frame check type on cE1/PRI, use the framing command. Use the no formof this command to remove the existing configuration and restore to the default framecheck type.

framing { crc4 | no-crc4 }

Syntax Description

crc4 Specifies CRC4 frame as the E1 frame type.

no-crc4 Specifies no CRC4 frame as the E1 frame type.

Default

No frame check for the E1 frame type on the cE1/PRI interface.

Command Mode




3-14

Usage Guideline

The cE1/PRI interface supports CRC 4 for the physical frame.

Example

! Specify CRC4 frame as the E1 frame type.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# framing crc4

3.2.4 linecode

To select the line-code type for cE1/PRI Interface, use the linecode command. Use theno form of this command to restore the default line-code type.

linecode { ami | hdb3 }

no linecode

Syntax Description

ami Specifies alternate mark inversion (AMI) as the line-code type.

hdb3 Specifies high-density bipolar 3 (HDB3) as the line-code type.

Default

HDB3 for E1 lines.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Use this command in configurations where the router or access server mustcommunicate with E1 data lines. The E1 service provider determines which line-codetype, either AMI or HDB3, is required for your E1 circuit.

Example

! Set the E1 line-code type to AMI

Quidway#(config-if-E1-0)# linecode ami

3.2.5 loopback

To loop packets back to the cE1/PRI interface, use the loopback command. Use theno form of this command to disables loopback.

loopback

no loopback



3-15

Default

loopback disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The cE1/PRI interface is set to have loopback test only when some special functionsare tested.

Example

! Configures the loopback test on the cE1/PRI interface.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# loopback

3.2.6 pri-group

To specify ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) on a cE1/PRI interface, use the pri-group command. Use the no form of this command to remove the ISDN PRI.

pri-group [ timeslots { number | number1-number2 } [ ,number | number1-number2 ... ] ]

no pri-group

Syntax Description

number Timeslot number, ranging 1 to 31. While specifying the bound timeslot, youspecify a single number, or the timeslot range number1-number2.

Note:Timeslot 16 is used to carry signaling, so it can not serve as a bind timeslot.

Default

No pri-group specified.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When this command is executed in cE1/PRI working mode, the cE1/PRI interface canonly bind the timeslots to a pri-group. It has the same logical features as those of theISDN dialup interface. It supports the link-layer protocols such as PPP and networkprotocols like IP and IPX. And it can be used to configure such parameters as DDR.



3-16

The fixed pri-group number is 15.

Example

! Bind timeslots 1, 2, 8-12 on the cE1/PRI interface.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# pri-group timeslots 1,2,8-12

Related Command

channel-group, using

3.2.7 using

To activate E1 or cE1/PRI working mode of the cE1/PRI interface, use the usingcommand.

using [ e1 | ce1 ]

Syntax Description

e1 E1 working mode.

ce1 cE1/PRI working mode.

Default

cE1/PRI working mode activated on the cE1/PRI interface.

Command Mode

cE1/PRI interface configuration mode.

Usage Guideline

When switched to E1, the cE1/PRI interface acts as a 2Mbps interface not divided intotimeslots. It has the same logical features as those at the sync serial interface.

When switched to cE1/PRI, the cE1/PRI interface is divided into 32 timeslots physically,corresponding to numbers 0~31. There are two methods for using this interface:

When serving as a cE1 interface, it can divide all the timeslots into a number ofchannel-groups. Each bound group of timeslots is used as an interface, which has thesame logical features as does the sync serial interface.

When serving as a PRI interface, timeslot 16 acts as D channel for transmittingsignaling, so a pri-group can be selected randomly from the other timeslots but timeslot16. When bound, this group acts as an interface, which has the same logical featuresas the ISDN dialup interface.

Example

! Activate E1 working mode of the cE1/PRI interface.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# using e1



3-17

3.2.8 show controller

To display information about the E1 links, use the show controller e1 command.

show controller e1 interface-number

Syntax Description

interface-number Number of the E1 interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command shows the following information: Physical status and protocol status of the E1 interface Clock mode at the E1 interface Framing mode at the E1 interface Linecode mode at the E1 interface

The information displayed is generally useful for diagnostic tasks performed bytechnical support personnel only.

Example

! Shows the related information about the E1 links.

Quidway(config-if-E1-0)# show controller e1 0E1 0 is down. Applique type is Channelized E1 - 75 OHM unbalanced Framing is NO-CRC4, Line Code is HDB3, Source Clock is Line.

HUAWEI®


03 – Link Layer Protocol Configuration (LLC)

User Manual - Command Reference (Volume 1)Versatile Routing Platform Table of Contents

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 PPP and MP Commands ............................................................................................ 1-11.1 encapsulation ppp ..................................................................................................... 1-11.2 multilink ..................................................................................................................... 1-21.3 multilink-user ............................................................................................................. 1-21.4 ppp authentication..................................................................................................... 1-31.5 ppp callback .............................................................................................................. 1-41.6 ppp chap host............................................................................................................ 1-51.7 ppp chap password ................................................................................................... 1-61.8 ppp compression stac ............................................................................................... 1-61.9 ppp multilink .............................................................................................................. 1-71.10 ppp negotiation timeout........................................................................................... 1-81.11 ppp pap sent-username .......................................................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 SLIP Commands ......................................................................................................... 2-12.1 encapsulation slip...................................................................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3 ISDN Commands......................................................................................................... 3-13.1 isdn answer1 ............................................................................................................. 3-13.2 isdn answer2 ............................................................................................................. 3-23.3 show isdn active........................................................................................................ 3-23.4 show isdn answer...................................................................................................... 3-33.5 show isdn status........................................................................................................ 3-43.6 show isdn timer ......................................................................................................... 3-5

Chapter 4 LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switching Commands............................................................ 4-14.1 clear xot..................................................................................................................... 4-24.2 encapsulation lapb .................................................................................................... 4-24.3 encapsulation x25 ..................................................................................................... 4-34.4 lapb k......................................................................................................................... 4-44.5 lapb modulo............................................................................................................... 4-54.6 lapb n1....................................................................................................................... 4-64.7 lapb n2....................................................................................................................... 4-64.8 lapb t1........................................................................................................................ 4-74.9 lapb t2........................................................................................................................ 4-84.10 lapb t3...................................................................................................................... 4-84.11 x25 accept-reverse.................................................................................................. 4-94.12 x25 address........................................................................................................... 4-104.13 x25 alias ................................................................................................................ 4-114.14 x25 check-response-address ................................................................................ 4-12


ii

4.15 x25 default............................................................................................................. 4-134.16 x25 facility.............................................................................................................. 4-134.17 x25 hic ................................................................................................................... 4-154.18 x25 hoc.................................................................................................................. 4-164.19 x25 hold-queue...................................................................................................... 4-174.20 x25 hold-vc-timer................................................................................................... 4-174.21 x25 htc................................................................................................................... 4-184.22 x25 idle .................................................................................................................. 4-194.23 x25 ips ................................................................................................................... 4-204.24 x25 lic .................................................................................................................... 4-214.25 x25 linkrestart ........................................................................................................ 4-224.26 x25 loc ................................................................................................................... 4-224.27 x25 ltc .................................................................................................................... 4-234.28 x25 map................................................................................................................. 4-244.29 x25 modulo............................................................................................................ 4-264.30 x25 nvc .................................................................................................................. 4-274.31 x25 ops.................................................................................................................. 4-284.32 x25 pvc (encapsulating) ........................................................................................ 4-294.33 x25 pvc (switched) ................................................................................................ 4-304.34 x25 pvc (XOT) ....................................................................................................... 4-314.35 x25 response-called-address ................................................................................ 4-324.36 x25 response-calling-address ............................................................................... 4-334.37 x25 roa .................................................................................................................. 4-344.38 x25 route ............................................................................................................... 4-354.39 x25 route (XOT) .................................................................................................... 4-364.40 x25 routing............................................................................................................. 4-364.41 x25 suppress-called-address ................................................................................ 4-374.42 x25 suppress-calling-address ............................................................................... 4-384.43 x25 threshold......................................................................................................... 4-384.44 x25 tx0................................................................................................................... 4-394.45 x25 tx1................................................................................................................... 4-404.46 x25 tx2................................................................................................................... 4-414.47 x25 tx3................................................................................................................... 4-424.48 x25 use-source-address........................................................................................ 4-424.49 x25 win .................................................................................................................. 4-434.50 x25 wout ................................................................................................................ 4-444.51 show x25 alias....................................................................................................... 4-454.52 show x25 interface ................................................................................................ 4-454.53 show x25 map ....................................................................................................... 4-484.54 show x25 switch-vc-table ...................................................................................... 4-494.55 show x25 route...................................................................................................... 4-494.56 show x25 vc........................................................................................................... 4-50


iii

4.57 debug x25 xot........................................................................................................ 4-51

Chapter 5 Frame Relay Commands............................................................................................ 5-15.1 clear frame-relay-inarp .............................................................................................. 5-15.2 encapsulation frame-relay......................................................................................... 5-25.3 frame-relay interface-dlci........................................................................................... 5-25.4 frame-relay intf-type .................................................................................................. 5-35.5 frame-relay inverse-arp ............................................................................................. 5-45.6 frame-relay ip tcp header-compress ......................................................................... 5-55.7 frame-relay lmi-n391dte ............................................................................................ 5-65.8 frame-relay lmi-n392dce ........................................................................................... 5-65.9 frame-relay lmi-n392dte ............................................................................................ 5-75.10 frame-relay lmi-n393dce ......................................................................................... 5-85.11 frame-relay lmi-n393dte .......................................................................................... 5-95.12 frame-relay lmi-t391dte ......................................................................................... 5-105.13 frame-relay lmi-t392dce ........................................................................................ 5-115.14 frame-relay lmi-type .............................................................................................. 5-125.15 frame-relay local-dlci ............................................................................................. 5-125.16 frame-relay map .................................................................................................... 5-135.17 frame-relay route................................................................................................... 5-145.18 frame-relay switching ............................................................................................ 5-155.19 show frame-relay lmi ............................................................................................. 5-165.20 show frame-relay map........................................................................................... 5-165.21 show frame-relay packet ....................................................................................... 5-175.22 show frame-relay pvc ............................................................................................ 5-175.23 show frame-relay route ......................................................................................... 5-185.24 show frame-relay status ........................................................................................ 5-195.25 show frame-relay traffic......................................................................................... 5-205.26 debug frame-relay ................................................................................................. 5-20

Chapter 6 HDLC Commands ....................................................................................................... 6-16.1 encapsulation hdlc .................................................................................................... 6-16.2 keepalive ................................................................................................................... 6-16.3 debug hdlc................................................................................................................. 6-2

User Manual - Command Reference (Volume 1)Versatile Routing Platform

Chapter 1PPP and MP Commands

1-1

Chapter 1 PPP and MP Commands

PPP and MP configuration commands include: encapsulation ppp multilink multilink-user ppp authentication ppp callback ppp chap host ppp chap password ppp compression stac ppp multilink ppp negotiation timeout ppp pap sent-username

1.1 encapsulation ppp

To configure the link-layer protocol encapsulation on the interface as PPP, use thecommand encapsulation ppp.

encapsulation ppp

Default

Default protocol encapsulation is PPP.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

PPP is a link-layer protocol supporting network-layer packets over the point-to-pointlink. It defines a whole set of protocols including LCP (link control protocol), NCP(network-layer control protocol), PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP(Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). It is widely in use for it provides userauthentication, easy scalability and supports synchronization and asynchronization.

The link-layer encapsulation protocol on the local interface should be the same as thaton the remote interface.

Example

! The following example configures PPP encapsulation on interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation ppp

Related Command

show interface



1-2

1.2 multilink

To configure MP parameter, use the command multilink.

multilink { max-bind binds | max-frags frags }

Syntax Description

binds Maximum number of link binds allowed by a MP.

Frags Maximum number of fragments allowed by a MP.

Default

Default number is 4 for both the binds and frags.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The multilink max-bind binds command can be used to set the maximum number oflink binds allowed by an MP.

MP allows a data packet to be broken down into fragments so that they can be sentover different links to improve efficiency. The multilink max-frags frags command canbe used to set the maximum number of fragments allowed.

These two parameters will affect the size of the receiving buffer, so one should makechoice according to the actual situation.

Example

! The following example sets the maximum number of link binds for an MP to 10.

Quidway(config)# multilink max-bind 10

! The following example sets the maximum number of frags for an MP to 10.

Quidway(config)# multilink max-frags 10

Related Command

ppp multilink, multilink-user

1.3 multilink-user

To configure MP binds based on the username, use the command multilink-user.

multilink-user user-name bind virtual-template number

Syntax Description

user-name username.

number interface serial number.



1-3

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The specified interface should be encapsulated with PPP, and its MP attributes shouldbe specified.

After PPP authentication succeeds, it can be decided whether to bind the MP based onthe remote username and which interface’s operating parameter is to be adopted forbinding. If a virtual interface template is specified, a new virtual interface will beadopted.

Example

! The following example specifies the corresponding virtual interface template 1 for theusername Quidway, and configures the IP address of the virtual interface template as202.38. 60.1.

Quidway(config)# multilink-user Quidway bind virtual-template 1

Quidway(config)# interface virtual-template 1

Quidway(config-virtual-template1)# ip address 202.38.60.1 255.255.255.0

Related Command

ppp multilink

1.4 ppp authentication

To set the PPP authentication method for the remote router, use the command pppauthentication. To disable the configuration, use the no form of the command.

ppp authentication { chap | pap | chap pap | pap chap } [ callin ] [ default | name-list ]

no ppp authentication

Syntax Description

chap using CHAP authentication

pap using PAP authentication

chap pap first performs CHAP authentication, then perform PAP authentication

pap chap first performs PAP authentication, then perform CHAP authentication

callin means that only when the remote user calls in can he be authenticated.

default and name-list AAA authentication methods lists. For detailed description, referto the corresponding section of AAA settings.

Default

No PPP authentication is specified.



1-4

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

There are two PPP authentication methods: PAP and CHAP. PAP is a twice handshakeauthentication, which transfers the password in plain text. CHAP is a three-timehandshake, which does not transfer the password in the network. Comparatively,CHAP authentication has the better secrecy, and is more secure and reliable.

At an asynchronous dialer interface, you can perform authentication only on incomingcalls instead of outgoing calls. This configuration is necessary when the router servesas an access server.

In addition, the defined AAA authentication method is used.

CHAP or PAP is just an authentication process. The success of the authentication isdecided by AAA, which can authenticate based on the local authentication database orAAA server.

Example

! The following example authenticates the remote router by means of PAP method oninterface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp authentication pap

Related Command

user, ppp chap host, ppp pap sent-username, aaa authentication ppp

1.5 ppp callback

To enable PPP to send or accept the callback request, use the command ppp callback.To disable the function, use the no form of the command.

ppp callback { request | accept }

no ppp callback { request | accept }

Syntax Description

request sending a callback request.

accept accepting a callback request.

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode




1-5

Usage Guideline

The callback function can save transmission costs for the caller. Callback function isnecessary in some special circumstances.

Example

! The following example enables interface Serial0 to accept PPP callback request.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp callback accept

Related Command

encapsulation ppp

1.6 ppp chap host

To the local router name with the CHAP, use the command ppp chap host. To disablethe configuration, use the no form of the command.

ppp chap host hostname

no ppp chap host

Syntax Description

hostname name of the local router

Default

Quidway or domain name of a router configured via the hostname command.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

While configuring CHAP authentication, you need to configure the hostname as theremote user, and the corresponding password must be the same. The no form of thecommand can delete the configured hostname (name of the local router).

Example

! The following example configures the local router named as Quidway when CHAPauthentication is performed on interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp chap host Quidway

Related Command

ppp authentication, user



1-6

1.7 ppp chap password

To configure the default CHAP password when the local router authenticates theremote router, use the command ppp chap password. To disable the configuration,use the no form of the command.

ppp chap password { 0 | 7 } password

no ppp chap password

Syntax Description

password Password transmitted.

0 Display the password simple text.

7 Display the password in encrypted text.

Default

CHAP password is null.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

While configuring CHAP authentication, if you cannot find out the username that is sentfrom the far end in the user table, authenticate the remote user with the passwordconfigured via this command.

Example

! The following example sets the user password as Quidway in simple text when thelocal routers perform the authentication via CHAP.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp chap password 0 Quidway

Related Command

ppp authentication chap, user

1.8 ppp compression stac

To enable the Stac compression algorithm on the PPP of the interface, use thecommand ppp compression stac. To disable the function, use the no form of thecommand.

ppp compression stac

no ppp compression stac

Default

Disabled.



1-7

Command Mode

Interface configuration mode.

Usage Guideline

When Stac compression is configured on the interface, the data frame size can bereduced through data compression without incurring damage to the data. But in thisway, it use will add to the load of your router. So you had better disable this function. Inaddition, only when Stac is configured at both ends of a point-to-point link will this PPPlink support Stac compression.

Example

! The following example configures Stac compression on the local router.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp compression stac

1.9 ppp multilink

To enable Multilink PPP (MP) on interface, use the command ppp multilink. To disablethe MP attribute, use the no form of the command.

ppp multilink

no ppp multilink

Default

SP (Single PPP) mode.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

To increase bandwidth, multiple PPP links can be bound to form a logical MP interface.For this purpose, it is necessary to specify a virtual interface template on thecorresponding physical interface. MP can be configured on any physical interfaceencapsulated with PPP, and it can also be configured on the virtual interface templateand Dialer interfaces.

Note that, to use MP on the virtual interface template and Dialer interface, The physicalinterface can only use MP only after the MP on this template and interface is enabledfirst.

Example

! The following example configures PPP encapsulation on interface Serial0 operates inMP mode.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp multilink



1-8

Related Command

encapsulation ppp, multilink-user, interface virtual-template

1.10 ppp negotiation timeout

To set the PPP negotiation timeout, use the command ppp negotiation timeout. Torestore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

ppp negotiation timeout seconds

ppp negotiate timeout

Syntax Description

seconds negotiation timeout in second. During PPP negotiation, if noacknowledgement is received from the remote end within this time range, PPP willretransmit the packets that have been previously transmitted.

Default

3 seconds.

Command Mode


Example

! The following example sets the PPP negotiation timeout to 10 seconds.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp negotiate timeout 10

Related Command

encapsulation ppp

1.11 ppp pap sent-username

To configure the username and password when the local router is authenticated by theremote router via the PAP method, use the command ppp pap sent-username. Todisable the configuration, use the no form of the command.

ppp pap sent-username sent-username password { 0 | 7 } password

no ppp pap sent-username

Syntax Description

sent-username username sent.

password password sent.

0 password in simple text.

7 password in encrypted text.



1-9

Default

When the local router is authenticated by the remote end via PAP method, both theusername and password sent are “quidway” by default.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the local router is authenticated via the PAP method by the remote router, thesent-username and password sent by the local router must be the same as the userand password of the remote router.

Example

! The following example sets the username of the local router authenticated by theremote end via the PAP method as Huawei and the password as Quidway.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ppp pap sent-username Huawei password 0 Quidway

Related Command

ppp authentication pap, user


Chapter 2SLIP Commands

2-1

Chapter 2 SLIP Commands

SLIP configuration commands include: encapsulation slip

2.1 encapsulation slip

To set the SLIP protocol encapsulation on the interface

encapsulation slip

Default

Protocol encapsulation on the interface is PPP encapsulation.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

SLIP (Serial Line IP), a simpler link-layer protocol, can be used over a point-to-point link.It is mainly used to run TCP/IP over the point-to-point serial interface connection. SLIPcan only be used over the asynchronous link.

SLIP simply defines the start and end signs for a frame so as to intercept the IP packeton the serial line. As compared with PPP, it involves no address concept, no negotiationprocess, no packet type discrimination (so only one network protocol can be supportedat one time), and no error correction function.

While SLIP is used, SLIP encapsulation must be configured on the interfaces at bothends of a link.

Example

! The following example configures SLIP encapsulation on interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-serial0)# encapsulation slip


Chapter 3ISDN Commands

3-1

Chapter 3 ISDN Commands

ISDN configuration commands include: isdn answer1 isdn answer2 show isdn active show isdn answer show isdn status show isdn timer

3.1 isdn answer1

To have the router verify a called-party number or sub-address number in the incomingsetup packet, use the command isdn answer1. To remove the verification request, usethe no form of the command.

isdn answer1 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ]

no isdn answer1 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ]

Syntax Description

called-party-number called number, 20 or fewer characters long.

subaddress sub-address, 20 or fewer digits/letters long, case insensitive.

Default

The router does not verify the called number or sub-address number.

Command Mode

ISDN BRI and PRI Interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

This command is used to set checking items in the incoming setup packet. When thesub-address is set, this call will be rejected be the remote user no sending a sub-address or sending a wrong sub-address.

In addition, the isdn answer2 command can be used to set an additional check item.

Example

! The following example sets the check number for BRI0 incoming setup packet to66668888.

Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# isdn answer1 66668888

! The following example removes the above setting.

Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# no isdn answer1



3-2

Related Command

isdn answer2, show isdn answer

3.2 isdn answer2

To have the router verify an additional called-party number or sub-address number inthe coming setup packet, use the command isdn answer2. To remove the verificationrequest, use the no form of the command.

isdn answer2 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ]

no isdn answer2 [ called-party-number ] [ :subaddress ]

Syntax Description

called-party-number called number, 20 or fewer characters long.

Subaddress sub-address, 20 or fewer digits/letters long, case insensitive.

Default

The router does not verify the called number or sub-address number.

Command Mode

ISDN BRI and PRI Interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

This command is used to set checking items in incoming setup packet. When the sub-address is set, this call will be rejected be the remote user not sending a sub-address orsending a wrong sub-address.

The additional check item and check item are two independent settings. Meeting eitherof them, an incoming setup packet can pass the check.

Example

! The following example sets the sub-address requiring additional verification oninterface Bri0 to sub2000.

Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# isdn answer2: sub2000

! The following example removes the above setting.

Quidway(config-if-Bri0)# no isdn answer2

Related Command

isdn answer1, show isdn answer

3.3 show isdn active

To display the current call information on the ISDN interface, use the command showisdn active.



3-3

show isdn active [ interface interface-name ]

Syntax Description

interface-name name of the interface. If no interface name is specified, all the currentcall information will be displayed.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The user can use the information shown via this command to diagnose the ISDN callproblems.

Example

The following is sample output from the command.

Quidway# show isdn active interface bri 0Bri0 :Channel Call Call Calling Calling Called CalledInfo Property Type Number Subaddress Number SubaddressB1 Digital Out 8810124B2 Analog In 8810118 380 8810150 2201

The above information indicates that there are two active calls on the ISDN Bri0interface:

Digital call to 8810124 by B1 channel. Analog call from a terminal whose number is 8810118 and sub-address is 380 by

B2 channel.

3.4 show isdn answer

To display the incoming called-party number and sub-address to be checked on theISDN interface, use the command show isdn answer.

show isdn answer [ interface interface-name ]

Syntax Description

interface-name name of the interface. If no interface name is specified, all the incomingcalled-party number and sub-address will be checked on ISDN interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After incoming call verification is over, the user can confirm if the configuration iscorrect according to the information output via this command.



3-4

Example

! The following is sample output from the command.

Quidway# show isdn answer interface bri 0Bri0 : ISDN Answer1 66668888 ISDN Answer2 :sub2000

The above information indicates that the called-party number to be checked on Bri0 inincoming setup packet is 66668888, the sub-address requiring additional check issub2000.

Related Command

isdn answer1, isdn answer2

3.5 show isdn status

To display the current status of the ISDN interface, use the command show isdnstatus.

show isdn status [ interface interface-name ]

Syntax Description

interface-name name of the interface. If no interface name is specified, all the currentstatus on the ISDN interface will be displayed.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The information output via this command includes the states of the layers of the ISDNprotocol on the interface, including Q.921 and Q.931. Using this command, users canmake fault diagnosis.

Example


Quidway# show isdn status interface bri 0Bri0: Layer 2 Status: TEI = 64 , State = MULTIPLE_FRAME_ESTABLISHED Layer 3 Status:2 Active Layer 3 Call(s) CCIndex = 0x0001 , State = Setup , CES = 1 , Channel =0x00000002 ,Calling_Num = 661003 , Calling_Sub = , Called_Num = 660066 , Called_Sub= CCIndex = 0x0000 , State = Active , CES = 1 , Channel = 0x00000001 , Calling_Num = 661004 , Calling_Sub = , Called_Num = 660066 , Called_Sub=

The above information indicates the following: layer-2 link TEI on ISDN Bri0 is 64, and its status is multiple-frame-setup



3-5

The count of active calls on layer 3 is 2. For the call with index number 0x000, itsstate is Setup, CES is 1, channel is 0x00000002, the calling and called numbersare 661003 and 660066 respectively, and calling and called sub-addresses areboth vacant.

For the call with index number 0x0000, its status is Active, CES is 1, the channel is0x00000001, the calling and called numbers are 661004 and 660066 respectively,the calling and called sub-addresses are both vacant.

Related Command

show interface

3.6 show isdn timer

To display the value of the ISDN timer, use the command show isdn timer.

show isdn timer

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is mainly intended for technical support engineers in their faultdiagnosis and troubleshooting.

Example

! The following is sample output of the command.

Quidway# show isdn timerISDN Layer 2 values K = 1 Outstanding I-frames on BRI port N200 = 3 Max number of retransmits T200 = 1 Seconds T202 = 2 Seconds T203 = 10 SecondsISDN Layer 3 Values T301 = 240 Seconds T302 = 15 Seconds T303 = 4 Seconds T304 = 15 Seconds T305 = 30 Seconds T308 = 4 Seconds T309 = 90 Seconds T310 = 10 Seconds T313 = 4 Seconds T314 = 4 Seconds T316 = 120 Seconds T317 = 10 Seconds T318 = 4 Seconds T319 = 4 Seconds T321 = 30 Seconds T322 = 4 Seconds

Related Command

show interface


Chapter 4LAPB, X.25 and X.25 Switching Commands

4-1

Chapter 4 LAPB, X.25 and X.25 SwitchingCommands

LAPB, X.25, and X.25 switch configuration commands include: clear xot encapsulation lapb encapsulation x25 lapb k lapb modulo lapb n1 lapb n2 lapb t1 lapb t2 lapb t3 x25 accept-reverse x25 address x25 alias x25 check-response-address x25 default x25 facility x25 hic x25 hoc x25 hold-queue x25 hold-vc-timer x25 htc x25 idle x25 ips x25 lic x25 linkrestart x25 loc x25 ltc x25 map x25 modulo x25 nvc x25 ops x25 pvc x25 pvc x25 pvc XOT x25 response-called-address x25 response-calling-address x25 roa x25 route x25 route XOT x25 routing x25 supress-called-address x25 supress-calling-address x25 threshold x25 tx0 x25 tx1 x25 tx2 x25 tx3 x25 use-source-address



4-2

x25 win x25 wout show x25 alias show x25 interface show x25 map show x25 switch-vc-table show x25 route show x25 vc debug x25 xot

4.1 clear xot

To clear a XOT link initiatively, use the command clear xot remote ip-address1 port1local ip-address2 port2

clear xot remote ip-address1 port1 local ip-address2 port2

Syntax Description

remote indicates that the following parameters are those of the remote host.

ip-address1 the remote ip-address connected via XOT

port1 the remote port number connected via XOT

local indicates that the following parameters are those of the local host.

ip-address2 the local ip-address connected via XOT

port2 the local port number connected via XOT

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Using the command clear xot can initiatively clear the XOT link.

Example

! Clear a XOT link.

Quidway# clear xot remote 10.1.1.2 1024 local 10.1.1.1 1998

Related Command

show x25 vc x25 routing

4.2 encapsulation lapb

To specify a serial interface using LAPB encapsulation, use the commandencapsulation lapb.

encapsulation lapb [ dte | dce ] [ ip ]



4-3

Syntax Description

dte specifies operation as a data terminal equipment device.

dce specifies operation as a data communications equipment device.

ip specifies the IP as the network-layer protocol supported by LAPB.

Default

DTE operation is the default LAPB mode. IP is the default protocol.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Though a layer-2 protocol of X.25, LAPB can act as an independent link-layer protocolfor serial interface encapsulation and simple data transmission. Generally, LAPBencapsulation can be used when two routers are connected directly with a dedicatedline. Now one end works in DTE mode, and the other in DCE mode.

Example

! The following example sets the operating mode as DCE and specifies LAPBencapsulation on Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation lapb dce

Related Command

show interface

4.3 encapsulation x25

To specify a serial interface’s operation as an X.25 device, use the commandencapsulation x25. Later on, all the incoming or outgoing datagram will be transmittedin X.25 encapsulation mode. The interface that has executed this command is calledthe X.25 interface.

encapsulation x25 [ dte | dce ] [ ietf | ddn | bfe | cisco-compatible ]

Syntax Description

dte specifies operation as a DTE. This is the default mode.

dce specifies operation as a DCE.

ietf specifies that the interface’s datagram encapsulation defaults to use of the IETFstandard method, as defined by RFC-1356.

ddn specifies DDN encapsulation on an interface using DDN X.25 standard service.

bfe specifies BFE encapsulation on an interface attached to a BFE device.

cisco-compatible specifies that the interface datagram encapsulation is compatiblewith that of Cisco.



4-4

Default

The default interface encapsulation is PPP. For X.25 encapsulation, the defaultoperation is DTE IETF.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

One end of an X.25 link must be a logical DCE and the other end a logical DTE (Thisassignment is independent of the interface’s hardware DTE or DCE identity). Typically,when connecting to an X.25 public data network (PDN), the customer equipment actsas the DTE and the PDN attachment acts as the DCE. However, if two routers areconnected simply back to back, both routers actually act as user equipment (routers).The both ends of this connection should be a logical DTE and a DCE respectively (thatis, in a setting where the two routers are connected back-to-back, one works in DTEmode and the other in DCE mode).

Once a X.25 interface is re-encapsulated, be it with other link-layer protocol or X.25protocol, all the X.25 parameters that you have configured except the address mappingare restored to their default values. That is to say, when X.25 encapsulation is usedagain on this interface, you can only use address mapping among the configurationsthat have been previously used.

In a normal application without any special requirement, please select datagramencapsulation in the IETF format.

Example

! The following example specifies the use of X.25 encapsulation on the specifiedSerial0, which works in DTE IETF mode.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 dte ietf

Related Command

show interface

4.4 lapb k

To configure the LAPB window parameter K, use the command lapb k. To restore thedefault value of LAPB window parameter K, use the no form of the command.

lapb k k-value

no lapb k

Syntax Description

k-value maximum permissible number of I frames to be determined by the DTE or DCEin the specified time. If the modulo size is 8, then the window parameter K ranges 1through 7; if the modulo size is 128, the window parameter K ranges 1 through 127.



4-5

Default

Default window parameter K is 7.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The value of the window parameter K needs to be determined by the modulo size. nolapb k is used to restore the default value.

Example

! The following example sets the LAPB window parameter K as 7 on Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb k 7

Related Command

lapb modulo

4.5 lapb modulo

To specify the LAPB frame protocol mode (also called modulo size), use the commandlapb modulo. Use the no form of the command to restore to the default value.

lapb modulo { 128 | 8 }

no lapb modulo

Syntax Description

128 modulo128 protocol mode is used.

8 modulo128 protocol mode is used..

Default

Default LAPB frame protocol mode is modulo 8.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

There are two LAPB frame protocol methods: modulo 8 and modulo 128. Each dataframe (I frame) is numbered in sequence, ranging 0 to one less than the windowmodulus. And serial numbers will cycle within the range of modulo size.

Modulo 8 is a basic method, implemented by all the standard LAPB standards. It issufficient for most links. Modulo 128 can achieve greater throughput on a high-speedlink that has a lower error rate. The maximum value of the LAPB window parameter K isconstrained by modulo size, that is, the maximum value is one less than the window



4-6

modulus; and K specifies the maximum frames that can be sent before receipt of theacknowledgement.

Example

! The following example set the LAPB frame protocol mode on Serial0 to modulo 8

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb modulo 8

Related Command

lapb k

4.6 lapb n1

To configure the LAPB N1parameter, use the command lapb n1. To restore to thedefault N1 value, use the no form of the command.

lapb n1 n1-value

no lapb n1

Syntax Description

n1-value the N1 parameter, ranging 1080 bits to 12056 bits.

Default

Default is 12032 bits.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The N1 value is the maximum number of bits of I frame that the DCE or DTE expects toreceive from the DTE or DCE. This value should be 8 times the MTU plus the packetsize of the protocol header. This value defines the maximum size of the transmissionframe, thus deciding the maximum size of the encapsulated X.25 packet.

Example

! The following example sets the LAPB N1parameter on Serial0 to 1080.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb n1 1080

4.7 lapb n2

To specify LAPB N2 parameter, use the command of lapb n2. To restore to the defaultvalue, use the no form of the command.

lapb n2 n2-value

no lapb n2



4-7

Syntax Description

n2-value the value of the N2 parameter, ranging 1 to 255.

Default

Default value of LAPB N2 parameter is 5.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The N2 value is the maximum numbers of tries for successful frame transmissions froma DCE/DTE to a DTE/DCE.

Example

! The following example sets the LAPB N2 parameter on Serial0 to 20.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb n2 20

4.8 lapb t1

To se the LAPB transmission timer T1, use the command lapb t1. To restore to thedefault value of T1, use the no form of the command.

lapb t1 t1-value

no lapb t1

Syntax Description

t1-value the value of T1, ranging 1ms to 64000 ms.

Default

Default value of T1 for the LAPB system is 2000ms.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

T1 is a transmission timer. When T1 expires, DTE (DCE) will start retransmission. Thevalue of T1 should be greater than the maximum time spanning between sending aframe and receiving an acknowledgement. no lapb t1 is used to restore the defaultvalue of this parameter.

Example

! The following example sets the T1 transmission timer on Serial0 to 1000ms.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# lapb t1 1000



4-8

Related Command

lapb t2, lapb t3

4.9 lapb t2

To configure LAPB system transmission timer T2, use the command lapb t2. To restoreto the default value of T2, use the no form of the command.

lapb t2 t2-value

no lapb t2

Syntax Description

t2-value the value of the timer T2, ranging 1ms to 64000 ms.

Default

Default value of the LAPB system timer is 1000ms.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

T2 is a reception timer. When it times out, the DTE/DCE must send anacknowledgement frame so that this frame can be received before the remoteDTE/DCE T1 timer expires (T2<T1). no lapb t2 is used to restore the default value ofthis parameter.

Example

! The following example sets the LAPB timer T2 on Serial0 to 2000ms.


Related Command

lapb t1

4.10 lapb t3

To set the LAPB system timer T3, use the command of lapb t3. To restore to the defaultvalue of T3, use the no form of the command.

lapb t3 t3-value

no lapb t3

Syntax Description

t3-value value of the timer T3, ranging 0ms to 64000ms.



4-9

Default

Default value of the LAPB timer T3 is 0ms.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

T3 is an idle timer. When it expires, the DCE reports to the packet layer that the channelstays idle for a long time. It should be greater than the timer T1 (T3>T1) on a DCE.When T3 is 0, this indicates that it does not function yet. no lapb t3 is used to restorethe default value of this parameter.

Example

! The following example sets the LAPB timer T3 on Serial0 to 10000ms.


Related Command

lapb t1

4.11 x25 accept-reverse

To configure an X.25 interface to accept all reverse charge calls, use the command x25accept-reverse. To disable the facility, use the no form of the command.

x25 accept-reverse

no x25 accept-reverse

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This function does not affect any call without the reverse charge call function

On an X.25 interface, you can enable the function of reverse charge call. Then, anysuch calls to the X.25 interface will be accepted. If the option of accept-reverse in thex25 map command enables the function for a mapping, only the calls with relatedmapping to this interface could be accepted while the other calls (i.e., the calls carryingthe request of reverse charge, but with no related mapping) will be cleared.

Use show x25 interface serial command, you can check if the function on an X.25interface is enabled.



4-10

Example

! The following example sets acceptance of reverse charge calls function on interfaceSerial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 accept-reverse

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, x25 map

4.12 x25 address

To set the X.121 address of an X.25 interface, use the command x25 address. Todelete the address, use the no form of the command.

x25 address x.121-address

no x25 address

Syntax Description

x.121-address X.121 address of an interface.

Default

If the data encapsulation format on this X.25 interface is IETF, this interface has noaddress. If the data encapsulation format on this X.25 interface is BFE or DDN, then theX121 address of this interface is derived through dynamic conversion of IP address onthis interface. And it is not allowed to modify this X.121 address.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If a router is connected to an X.25 public data network, then the ISP shall assign a legalX.121 address for it. In a setting where two routers are connected back to back, thislegal X.121 address can be specified at your discretion. If you want the router to work ina switched mode, you do not have to configure the X.121 address.

When you reconfigure an X.121 address for an X.25 interface, you do not have todelete the original X.121 address, for the new address will overwrite the old one. Afterre-encapsulating an X.25 interface, the original X.121 address will be deleted. Onlyafter the re-encapsulation shall the new X.121 address take effect.

Note: For the format of the X.121 address and the dynamic conversion of IP addressand X.121 address, please consult ITU-T Recommendation X.121 and relevant RFCdocuments.

Example

! The following example configures X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0 and setsthe X.121 address as 20112451.

Quidway(config)# interface serial 0



4-11

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 address 20112451

Related Command

show interface, show x25 interface

4.13 x25 alias

To specify an alias for X.25 interface that will allow the interface to match all types ofmode, use the command x25 alias. To delete the alias, use the no form of thecommand.

x25 alias match-type alias-string

no x25 alias match-type alias-string

Syntax Description

match-type match type of the alias. The optional match types include: free: free match free-ext: extended free match left: left alignment match left-ext: extended left alignment match right: right alignment match right-ext: extended right alignment match strict: strict match whole: whole match whole-ext: extended whole match

alias-string string of the alias

Default

No x.25 alias is configured.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When an X.25 call is forwarded between networks, different X.25 networks mayperform some operations on the destination addresses (that is, the called DTE address)carried by this call packet, for example, routinely adding or deleting the prefix and suffix.In this case, you need to set an interface alias for the router to adapt to this change.Please consult your ISP to learn if the network supports this function before deciding ifthe alias function is enabled or not.

For the detail about the X.25 alias matching method, please consult the chapter “LAPB,X.25 and X.25 Switch Configuration” in the manual of Configuration Guide.



4-12

Example

! The following example specifies X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0, configuresthe X.121 address as 20112451, and set two aliases in different match types for it.


Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25

Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# x25 address 20112451

Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# x25 alias 20112451$

Quidway(cofnig-if-Serial0)# x25 alias $20112451

With the above configurations, a call whose destination address is 20112451 can beaccepted as long as it can reach the local X.25 interface Serial0, no matter whether thenetwork is performing the prefix adding operation or suffix adding operation.

Related Command

show x25 alias, show x25 interface serial, x25 address

4.14 x25 check-response-address

To configure and check the field of the address code group in the X.25 callaccept/connection packet, use the command x25 check-response-address. Todisable the function, use the no form of the command.

x25 check-response-address

no x25 check-response-address

Default

no x25 check-response-address is checked.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Some networks require that, when the called DTE returns the call accept packet to thecalling DTE, it cannot carry the field of the called DTE address. Some require that itcannot carry the field of the calling DTE address. Some require that it can carry neitherwhile some require that it can carry both. To meet various requirements, the X. 25 of theQuidway series of routers offers this function. You can consult the ISP about theserequirements before deciding if this function is to be enabled or not.

Example

! The following example enables this function for the X.25 interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 check-response-address



4-13

Related Command

show x25 interface, x25 response-called-address, x25 response-calling-address

4.15 x25 default

To set a default protocol for X.25 interface, use the command x25 default. To removethe protocol specified, use the no form of the command.

x25 default protocol-type

no x25 default

Syntax Description

protocol-type protocol type.

Default

IP is carried over X.25 by default.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For received calls not carrying caller user data (CUD) or carrying a CUD that cannot beresolved, the X.25 of the Quidway series of routers need to decide the upper-layerprotocol over this call through this parameter. If this parameter is not configured, allsuch incoming calls will be cleared.

Example

! The following example sets the default upper-layer protocol over the X.25 interfaceSerial0 to IP.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 default ip

Related Command

x25 map

4.16 x25 facility

To set user options for an X.25 interface, use the command x25 facility. After an optionis set, all outgoing X.25 calls from the X.25 interface will carry a relevant informationfield. To disable the facility, use the no form of the command.

x25 facility facility-type facility-value

no x25 facility facility-type facility-value



4-14

Syntax Description

facility-type user facility type.

facility-value facility value.

Default

No facility is set.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The following table shows the user facilities supported by X.25 of the Quidway series ofrouters and the parameters required.

Table LLC-4-1 X.25 facility type and parameters

Facility type and parametervalue

Meaning

cug number Specifies a closed user group (CUG) number for the X.25 interface. CUG canbe used by a PDN to create a VPN within the larger network and to restrictaccess. CUGs 1 to 9999 are allowed.

packetsize in-size out-size Specifies input maximum packet size (in-size) and output maximum packetsize (out-size) for flow control parameter negotiation. Both values must be oneof the following value: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.

windowsize in-size out-size Specifies the packet count for input windows (in-size) and the output windows(out-size) when the call is originated by X.25 interface. Two parameters, i.e.,the in-size and out-size, must be in the range of 1 to one less than the windowmodulus (including 1 and one less than the modulus).

reverse Specifies reverse charging on all calls originated by this X.25 interface.throughput in out Set the requested throughput class negotiation values when a call is originated

by X.25 interface. The values of in/out are defined to be 75, 150, 300, 600,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 48000.

transit-delay value Specifies the maximum network transit delay to request for the duration ofoutgoing calls for a network when a call is originated by the X.25 interface. Youcan set this request to any value ranging 0 second to 65534 second (including0 and 65534).

roa name Specifies the name defined by the “x25 roa” command in Global configurationmode for the X.25 interface.

The user facilities set via this command are effective for all the calls originated by thisX.25 interface. You can set a user option for a X.25 call from a certain address mappingthrough the command of x25 map protocol-name protocol-address x.121-addressfacility-type facility-value.

Example

! The following example specifies the traffic flow parameters negotiation with theremote end for all the calls from the X.25 interface serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 facility packetsize 512 512

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 facility windowsize 5 5



4-15

Related Command

show x25 interface, x25 map

4.17 x25 hic

To set the highest incoming-only X.25 virtual circuit number, use the command x25 hic.To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 hic circuit-number

no x25 hic

Syntax Description

circuit-number virtual circuit number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is 0, you mustset another parameter lic (the lowest incoming-only virtual circuit number) of X.25 to 0,indicating that the incoming-only virtual circuit is disabled.

Default

Default highest incoming-only X.25 virtual circuit number is 0.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

By default, the Quidway series of routers disable the use of the incoming-only andoutgoing-only virtual circuit. Only the two-way range (1-1024) is kept for use. Please setthe VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP.

For VC setting requirements, please consult the chapter of “LAPB, X.25 and X.25Switch Configuration”.

Example

! The following example specifies X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, enables incoming-only and two-way virtual circuit and disables the outgoing-only virtual circuit. After thisserial command is executed, the three ranges are respectively: [1, 7], [8, 1024] and [0,0].



Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 lic 1

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hic 7

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ltc 8

Related Command

x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25 loc, x25 ltc



4-16

4.18 x25 hoc

To set the highest outgoing-only X.25 virtual circuit number, use the command x25 hoc.To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 hoc circuit-number

no x25 hoc

Syntax Description

circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is 0, you must set loc(the lowest outgoing-only virtual circuit number) to 0, indicating that the outgoing-onlyvirtual circuit is disabled.

Default

Default highest out-going virtual circuit number is 0.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline



Example

! The following example specifies X.25 encapsulation on Serial0,3 enables outgoing-only and two-way virtual circuit and disables the incoming-only virtual circuit. After thisserial command is executed, the three ranges are respectively: [1, 7], [8, 1024] and [0,0].




Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 htc 10

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 loc 15


Related Command

x25 hic, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25, x25 ltc



4-17

4.19 x25 hold-queue

To set the length of the hold queue of the X.25 Virtual circuit, use the command x25hold-queue. To restore the length of the queue to the default value, use the no form ofthe command.

x25 hold-queue queue-length

no x25 hold-queue

Syntax Description

queue-length length of the queue (with the number of packets as the unit).

Default

Default length of the hold queue in the X.25 VC is 50.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the data traffic is too heavy, you can use this command to extend the receivequeue and send queue of the X.25 VC to avoid data loss which may affect transmissionperformance. It should be noted here that modifying this parameter would not affect thehold queue limits of the existing VC.

Example

! The following example sets the X.25 hold queue to hold 75 datagrams.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hold-queue 75

Related Command

x25 ips, x25 ops

4.20 x25 hold-vc-timer

To start the timer that prevents additional calls to a destination, use the command x25hold-vc-timer. To restore the default value for the timer, use the no form of thecommand.

x25 hold-vc-timer minutes

no x25 hold-vc-timer

Syntax Description

minutes Number of minutes to prevent calls from going to previously failed destination.



4-18

Default

Default value is 0.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Sending call requests to a wrong destination (which does not exist or is faulty) willdeteriorate the working efficiency of the Quidway router. The use of this function canavoid this problem to some degree. If this parameter is set to 0, this is equal to disablingthe function. In addition, this function is effective to the locally originated calls only. Thatis, this parameter is meaningless when the X.25 of the Quidway router works inswitched mode.

Example

! The following example sets the timer on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 5 minutes.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hold-vc-timer 5

Related Command

show x25 interface serial

4.21 x25 htc

To set the highest two-way VC number, use the command x25 htc. To restore thedefault value, use the no form of the command.

x25 htc circuit-number

no x25 htc

Syntax Description

circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is 0, you must setanother X.25 parameter 1tc (lowest two-way VC number) to 0, indicating that the two-way VC is disabled.

For VC setting requirements, please consult “LAPB, X.25 and X.25 SwitchConfiguration”.

Default

Default highest two-way X.25 VC number is 1024.

Command Mode




4-19

Usage Guideline



Example

! The following command series configures X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0,disables the incoming-only virtual circuit, and enables the two-way and the outgoing-only virtual circuit. When this command series is executed, the three ranges are [0, 0],[8, 10] and [11, 20], respectively.







Related Command

x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 lic, x25 loc, x25 ltc

4.22 x25 idle

To define the maximum period of SVC idle time for a certain interface, use thecommand x25 idle To restore the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 idle minutes

no x25 idle

Syntax Description

minutes maximum SVC idle period in minute.

Default

0 minute.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This parameter does not affect a PVC and a SVC. When a SVC stays idle for a periodof time (without data transmission), X.25 in the Quidway series of routers will clear this



4-20

SVC automatically. If this parameter is set to 0, this SVC will be reserved no matter howlong it stays idle.

The setting of this parameter will affect all the SVCs on this X.25 interface. Also you canset the maximum idle time for a SVC attached to this address map through the option inthe command of x25 map.

Example

! The following example sets the maximum idle time for the SVC on interface Serial0 to10 minutes.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 idle 10

Related Command

clear x25 vc, x25 map

4.23 x25 ips

To set the maximum input packet size for an X.25 interface, use the command x25 ips.To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 ips bytes

no x25 ips

Syntax Description

bytes maximum packet size in byte. It can be one of the following value: 16, 32, 64, 28,256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.

Default

Default maximum packet size is 128.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Usually, the X.25 public data network has a maximum transmission packet size, andthe size of a packet sent by the DTE shall not exceed this length (otherwise it will triggerthe resetting of the VC). So, the DTEs at both the send and receive ends are required tohave the fragmentation and reassembling functions. The DTE at the send end breakthe packet into more packets with the more data bit (M-bit) set except for the last. Whenthe DTE at the receive end receives this series of fragments, it reassembles thesefragments into a packet according to the M bit, and sends it to the upper-layer protocol.Please consult your ISP about this maximum receive packet size.

Normally, the maximum receive packet size is equivalent to the maximum send packet.Unless your ISP allows, please do not set these two parameters to different values.



4-21

Example

! The following example sets the maximum incoming packet size and maximumoutgoing packet size on X.25 interface Serial0 to 256 bytes.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ips 256

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ops 256

Related Command

x25 facility, x25 ops, x25 pvc

4.24 x25 lic

To set the lowest incoming virtual circuit number, use the command x25 lic. To restoreto the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 lic circuit-number

no x25 lic

Syntax Description

circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If this parameter is set to 0, you must setanother X.25 parameter hic (the highest number of incoming-only virtual circuit) to 0,indicating that the incoming-only virtual circuit is disabled.

Default

Default lowest incoming-only virtual circuit number is 0.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline


For VC range setting requirements, please consult “LAPB, X.25 and X.25 SwitchConfiguration”.

Example

! The following example configures X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, enables theincoming-only and the two-way virtual circuits and disables the outgoing-only virtualcircuit. When this serial commands are executed, the three ranges are [1, 9], [11, 1024]and [0, 0], respectively.






4-22




Related Command

x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25, x25 ltc

4.25 x25 linkrestart

To force X.25 levels 3 (packet level) to restart when layer 2 (LAPB, link level) resets,use the command x25 linkrestart. To shut down the function, use the no form of thecommand.

x25 linkrestart

no x25 linkrestart

Default

Enabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Generally, this function is necessary. The function should not be shut down unlessspecial requirements are made for a network environment.

Example

! The following example shut down the function on the X.25 interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# no x25 linkrestart

Related Command

clear x25 vc

4.26 x25 loc

To set the lowest outgoing-only VC number, use the command x25 loc. To restore tothe default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 loc circuit-number

no x25 loc



4-23

Syntax Description

circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. If the parameter is set to 0, you must setanother X.25 parameter hoc (highest outgoing-only virtual circuit number) to 0,indicating that the outgoing-only virtual circuit is disabled.

Default

Default lowest outgoing-only virtual circuit number is 0.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline


For VC range setting requirements, please consult “LAPB, X.25 and X.25 SwitchConfiguration”.

Example

! The following serial command configures X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, disablesincoming-only virtual circuit, enables the two-way and the outgoing-only virtual circuits.When this serial command is executed, the three ranges are [0, 0], [1990, 1995] and[2000, 2005], respectively.






Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 hoc 2005

Related Command

x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25 ltc

4.27 x25 ltc

To set the lowest two-way VC number, use the command x25 ltc. To restore to thedefault value, use the no form of the command.

x25 ltc circuit-number

no x25 ltc



4-24

Syntax Description

circuit-number VC number, ranging 0 to 4095. It the parameter is set to 0, you must setanother X.25 parameter htc (the highest two-way VC number) to 0, indicating that thetwo-way VC is disabled.

Default

Default lowest two-way VC number is 1.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline


For VC range setting requirements, please consult “Chapter 4 LAPB, X.25 and X.25Switch Configuration”.

Example

! The following serial command configures X.25 encapsulation on Serial0, enables theincoming-only and two-way virtual circuits, and disables outgoing-only virtual circuit.When this serial commands are executed, the three ranges are [1, 9], [20, 25] and [0, 0],respectively.







Related Command

x25 hic, x25 hoc, x25 htc, x25 lic, x25 loc

4.28 x25 map

To set up the LAN protocols-to-X.121 address mapping, use the command x25 map.To retract a prior mapping, use the no form of the command.

x25 map { ip | ipx } protocol-address x.121-address [option]

no x25 map { ip | ipx } protocol-address



4-25

Syntax Description

protocol-type network protocol type of the address mapping. At present, X.25 of theQuidway series of routers supports both IP and IPX.

protocol-address network protocol address of the remote host.

x.121-address X.121 address of the remote host.

option additional feature or user facility (optional)

Default

No mapping is set up.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The X.25 network has no protocol to dynamically detect the remote X.121 address.Therefore, you must specify the corresponding mapping for all the destinationaddresses before X.25 can work correctly.

Once you have specified a mapping, all the contents of this mapping (including theprotocol address, X.121 address and all the options) cannot be changed. To make anymodification, you can first delete this mapping (with the no x25 map command), andthen set up a new mapping.

On the same X.25 interface, there should not be two or more mappings with the sameprotocol address (actually, the X.25 of the Quidway series of router will reject such aconfiguration). It is recommended that the X.121 addresses of all the mappings on aX.25 should be different from each other; otherwise, such configuration may have sideeffect on the system.

The following table shows all the options and their meanings:

Table LLC-4-2 Map Options Supported by X.25

Option Meaningaccept-reverse Accept a call to this address map with a reverse-charged call request. If

this option is not selected, all such requests will be cleared.broadcast Direct any broadcasts of network protocol and the multicast of IP to the

destination. This option provides powerful support for some routingprotocols (such as Routing Information Protocol).

cug group-number Specifies a closed user group number of an X.25 interface.idle minutes Maximum period of idle time for the VC associate with the address map. 0

means that the idle time is infinite.lin logical-channel-number Logic channel number of the address map in the backup center (please

consult “Backup Center Configuration”.no-incoming Deny call to the address map.no-outgoing Deny call originating from the address map.nvc count Maximum number of VCs for the map.packetsize in-size out-size When the address map is used to originate a call, it negotiates the

maximum packet size with the remote end. The packetsize is counted inbyte, which must range from 16 to 4096 (including 16 and 4096), and mustbe the integer power of 2.

reverse Specifies reverse charging for outgoing calls.throughput in out When the address map is used to originate a call, it negotiates throughput



4-26

Option Meaningwith the remote end. The value of in/out is defined to 75, 150, 300, 600,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 48000.

transit-delay milliseconds When the address map is used to originate a call, it carries the maximumtransmission transit delay request.

windowsize in-size out-size When the address is used to originate a call, it negotiates the windowsizewith the remote end. The in-size and out-size range between 1 andmodulo size minus 1 of the X.25 interface where the address is mapped(including 1 and modulo size minus 1).

roa name Name of the ROA list configured through the X25 roa command in Globalconfiguration mode on the X.25 interface.

Example

! The following example sets two mappings on the X.25 interface Serial0 and Serial1respectively. The attribute for each of the four mappings is different.


Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 map ip 202.38.160.11 20112451 reverse accept-reverse

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 map ip 202.38.160.138 20112450 packetsize 512 512idle 10


Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# x25 map ipx 20.30.4.1 25112451 windowsize 4 4broadcast

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 map ipx 20.30.4.8 25112450 no-incoming lin 6

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, show x25 map, x25 accept-reverse, x25 facility, x25idle, x25 nvc

4.29 x25 modulo

To configure a packet numbering mode of an X.25 interface, use the command x25modulo. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 modulo modulus

no x25 modulo

Syntax Description

modulus modulo size, whose value is 8 or 128.

Default

modulo 8.



4-27

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The slip window is the basis for X.25 traffic control, and the key about the slip window isthat the sent packets are numbered cyclically in order and are to be acknowledged bythe remote end. The order in numbering refers to the ascending order, like “…2, 3, 4, 5,6…” “Cyclically” means that the numbering starts again from the beginning when acertain number (called modulo) is reached. For example, when the modulo is 8, thenumbering goes “…4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1…”

X.25 defines two numbering modulus: 8 (also called the basic mode) and 128 (alsocalled extended mode), and the X.25 of the Quidway series of routers supports bothmodes.

Example

! The following example sets the modulo on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 128.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 modulo 128

Related Command

show interface, show x25 interface serial, x25 facility, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 win,x25 wout

4.30 x25 nvc

To set the maximum number of VCs that can be attached to all the address maps on theX.25 interface, use the command x25 nvc. To restore to the default value, use the noform of the command.

x25 nvc count

no x25 nvc

Syntax Description

count number of VCs, ranging 1 to 8.

Default

1.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If you set this parameter to a value greater than 1, a new VC to the same destinationwill be created on the line with a greater transit delay when the output window andoutput queue of the VC are full. Otherwise the data will be dropped.



4-28

Example

! The following example sets this parameter on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 3.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 nvc 3

Related Command

show interface, show 25 interface serial, x25 map

4.31 x25 ops

To set the maximum output packet size for an X.25 interface, use the command x25ops. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 ops bytes

no x25 ops

Syntax Description

bytes maximum output packet size in byte. The byte count can be a value of thefollowing: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.

Default

128 bytes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Usually, the X.25 public data network has a maximum output packet size, and the sizeof a packet sent by the DTE shall not exceed this length (otherwise it will trigger theresetting of the VC). So, the DTEs at both the send and receive ends are required tohave the fragmentation and reassembling function. That is, the DTE at the send endbreaks the packets with larger size into more packets with the more data bit set exceptfor the last. When the DTE at the receive end receives this series of fragments, itreassembles these fragments into a packet according to the M bit, and sends it to theupper-layer protocol. Please consult your ISP about this maximum input packet size.

Normally, the maximum input packet size is equivalent to the maximum output packet.Unless with your ISP’s permission, please do not set these two parameters to differentvalues.

Example

! The following example sets the maximum input and output packet sizes on the X.25interface Serial0 to 512 bytes.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ips 256

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 ops 256



4-29

Related Command

x25 facility, x25 ips, x25 pvc

4.32 x25 pvc (encapsulating)

To establish an encapsulation PVC, use the encapsulating version of the command x25pvc. To delete the PVC, use the no form of the command.

x25 pvc pvc-number protocol-type protocol-address x.121-address [ option ]

no x25 pvc pvc-number protocol-type protocol-address x.121-address [ option ]

Syntax Description

pvc-number PVC number, which must be a positive integer ranges between 1 and4095 (including 1 and 4095), and must be in the PVC range.

protocol-type supported protocol of this PVC.

protocol-address protocol address of the host at the other end of the PVC.

x.121-address remote X.121 address of this PVC.

option additional feature of this PVC (optional)

Default

By default, no encapsulation PVC is established. While creating a PVC, if you do notset the corresponding attributes, its traffic control parameter is the same as that on theX.25 interface (the traffic control parameter at an X.25 interface is set through suchcommands as x25 ips, x25 ops, x25 win, and x25 wout).

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

As a map is implied from the PVC configuration, it is not necessary (or impossible) tocreate a map first before creating PVCs.

Before creating PVCs, you should first enable the PVC range. The range is between 1and the lowest VC number minus 1(including 1 and the lowest VC number minus 1).Naturally, if the lowest VC number is 1, the PVC range will be disabled. The followingtable shows some typical PVC ranges.

Table LLC-4-3 PVC channel intervals of typical configurations

One-way inboundchannel interval

Two-way channelinterval

One-way outboundchannel interval PVC channel interval

[0, 0] [1, 1024] [0, 0] Disabled[0, 0] [10, 24] [0, 0] [1, 9][1, 10] [15, 30] [0, 0] Disabled[5, 10] [15, 25] [30, 32] [1, 4][0, 0] [0, 0] [20, 45] [1, 19][0, 0] [0, 0] [0, 0] [1, 4095]



4-30

While setting this PVC, you can specify some of its attributes, like the traffic controlparameter. The following table shows the options and their meanings.

Table LLC-4-4 Options and meanings of PVC attributes

Option Meaningbroadcast Broadcast to the remote end of this PVC.

packetsize in-size out-size The maximum packet size of this PVC in byte. Both value must be one ofthe following value: 16, 32, 64, 28, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.

windowsize in-size out-sizePacket count for input window and output window for this PVC, whichrange from 1 to the modulo size minus 1 on the X.25 interface where thisPVC is established (including 1 and modulo size minus 1).

Example

! The following example configures X.25 encapsulation on interface Serial0, enablesthe PVC range, and finally set two VCs.




Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 pvc 2 ip 202.38.168.1 20112451 broadcast packetsize512 512

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 pvc 6 ip 202.38.168.3 20112453 broadcastwindowsize 5 5

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, show x25, x25 map

4.33 x25 pvc (switched)

To configure a switched PVC route for a given interface, use the command x25 pvc. Todelete the route, use the no form of the command.

x25 pvc pvc-number1 interface serial number pvc pvc-number2 [option]

no x25 pvc pvc-number1 interface serial number pvc pvc-number2

Syntax Description

pvc-number1 PVC number that will be used on the input interface. It is a positiveinteger, ranging 1 to 4095.

pvc-number2 PVC number that will be used on the output interface. It is a positiveinteger, ranging 1 to 4095.

Number Output interface number.

option Adds certain features to the mapping specified.



4-31

Default

No switched PVC is configured.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

By configuring X.25 switching, you can use the Quidway series of routers as a simpleX.25 switch. When the PVC switch is configured, the input and output interfaces mustbe encapsulated with X.25, and the PVCs specified at both interfaces already existsand is valid. Note that no PVC switch can be configured on the X.25 sub-interface.

Example

! The following example packet switches the first PVC on Serial0 and the first PVC onSerial1.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation x25 dce ietf


Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# x25 pvc 1 in serial 0 pvc 1

Related Command

show x25 vc, x25 routing

4.34 x25 pvc (XOT)

To add a PVC route of XOT, use the command x25 pvc. To delete the PVC route of theappointed XOT, use the no form of the command.

x25 pvc pvc-number1 xot ip-address interface interface-type interface-number pvcpvc-number2 [ xot-keepalive-period seconds xot-keepalive-tries times xot-sourceinterface-name ]

no x25 pvc pvc-number1

Syntax Description

pvc-number1 PVC number of the interface at this end, ranging 1 to 4095.

pvc-number2 PVC number of the peer interface, ranging 1 to 4095.

ip-address The destination IP address connected via XOT.

interface-type Type of the peer interface.

interface-number Number of the peer interface.

seconds Delay of the keepalive timer connected via XOT. The timer sends keepalivepackets when it is overtime to detect the usability of the connection.

times The maximum failure time of sending keepalive. Disconnect the XOT link whenthe failure time exceeds times.



4-32

interface-name The name of the interface initiating XOT connection at this end.

Default

No PVC route.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After the user configures the XOT switch command of X.25 PVC, he can implement theconnection between local and remote X.25 net, spanning the IP net. After configuringkeepalive, it can support the link detection of XOT.

Example

! Connect PVC1 of interface Serial0 (10.1.1.1) on the router RTA to PVC2 of interfaceSerial1 (10.1.1.2) on the peer router RTB via XOT tunnel, to implement packetswitching.

! Configure on router RTA

RTA(config-if-Ethernet0)#ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0

RTA(config-if-Ethernet0)#interface serial 0

RTA(config-if-Serial0)#encapsulation x25 dce ietf

RTA(config-if-Serial0)#x25 pvc 1 xot 10.1.1.2 interface serial 1 pvc 2

! Configure on router RTB

RTB(config-if-Ethernet0)#ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0

RTB(config-if-Ethernet0)#interface serial 1

RTB(config-if-Serial1)#encapsulation x25 dce ietf

RTB(config-if-Serial1)#x25 pvc 1 xot 10.1.1.1 interface serial 0 pvc 1

Related Command

show x25 vc x25 routing

4.35 x25 response-called-address

To sets the called DTE address field in outgoing calls while X.25 sends the call inputpacket, use the command x25 response-called-address. To reset this command to itsdefault value, use the no form of the command.

x25 response-called-address

no x25 response-called-address



4-33

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, the input packet of a call may or may not carry an address codegroup, depending on the specific network requirements. This command enables you toeasily specify whether the input packet of a call sent by X.25 of the Quidway seriesrouters carries the called DTE address.

Example

! The following example specifies that the input packet of a call sent from the X.25interface Serial0 carries the called DTE address.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 response-called-address

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, x25 response-calling-address, x25 suppress-called-address, x25 suppress-calling-address

4.36 x25 response-calling-address

To sets the calling DTE address field in outgoing calls while X.25 sends the call inputpacket, use the command x25 response-calling-address. To reset this command toits default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 response-calling-address

no x25 response-calling-address

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, the input packet of a call may or may not carry an address codegroup, depending on the specific network requirements. This command enables you toeasily specify whether the input packet of a call sent by X.25 of the Quidway series ofrouters carries the calling DTE address.



4-34

Example

! The following example specifies that the input packet of a call sent from the X.25interface Serial0 carries the calling DTE address

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 response-calling-address

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, x25 response-called-address, x25 suppress-called-address, x25 suppress-calling-address

4.37 x25 roa

To define the ROA list, use the command x25 roa. To delete a ROA list entry, use theno form the command.

x25 roa roa-name id1 [ ,id2, id3…]

no x25 roa name id1 [ ,id2,id3…]

Syntax Description

name ROA name.

id ROA-specified ID which ranges from 0 through 9999. Multiple IDs can be specified.

Default

No x.25 roa is defined.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Multiple ROAs (0 to 20) can be configured, and multiple IDs (1 to 10) can be specifiedfor each ROA. When an ROA is configured, it can be quoted by name in the x25 facilityor x25 map command.

Example

! The following examples define two ROA lists, and then quote the list on serialinterfaces 0 and 1.

Quidway(config)# x25 roa list1 11 23 45

Quidway(config)# x25 roa list2 345


Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 facility roa list1


Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# x25 facility roa list2



4-35

Related Command

x25 facility, x25 map

4.38 x25 route

To create a SVC static route, use the command x25 route. To delete one such route,use the no form of the command.

x25 route x.121-address interface serial number

no x25 route x.121-address

Syntax Description

x.121-address remote x.121-address

number output interface number.

Default

No SVC static route is configured.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

By configuring the X.25 switch, you can use the Quidway series of routers as a simpleX.25 switch. While configuring the SVC switch, you do not have to configure X.25encapsulation on an outgoing interface. However, X.25 encapsulation on an outgoinginterface is necessary before this SVC route takes effect.

Example

! The following example switches VC 1 to interface Serial0, and switches VC 2 tointerface Serial1.

Quidway(config)# x25 route 1 interface serial 0

Quidway(config)# x25 route 2 interface serial 1





Related Command

show x25 route, x25 routing



4-36

4.39 x25 route (XOT)

To add a SVC route of XOT, use the command x25 route. To delete the SVC route ofthe appointed XOT, use the no form of the command.

x25 route dest-address xot ip-address [ xot-keepalive-period seconds ] [ xot-keepalive-tries times ] [ xot-source interface-name ]

no x25 route dest-address xot ip-address [ xot-keepalive-period seconds ] [ xot-keepalive-tries times ] [ xot-source interface-name ]

Syntax Description

dest-address the number of virtual circuit.

ip-address the destination ip-address connected via XOT.

seconds delay of the keepalive timer connected via XOT. When it is time out, the timersends keepalive packets to check the usability of the link.

times the maximum failure time of sending keepalive. When the time exceeds times,disconnect the XOT link.

interface-name the name of the interface initiating the XOT link.

Default

Seconds and times are 0.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After the user configures the XOT switch command of X.25 SVC, he can implement theconnection between local and remote X.25 net, spanning the IP net. After configuringkeepalive, it can support the link inspection.

Example

! Switch virtual circuit1 to the destination ip-address 10.1.1.1

Quidway(config)# x25 route 1 xot 10.1.1.1

Related Command

show x25 route x25 routing

4.40 x25 routing

To enabling X.25 switching, use the command x25 routing. To disable the function, usethe no form of the command.

x25 routing



4-37

no x25 routing

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The X.25 packet switch is to receive packets from an X.25 interface, and send themfrom a certain interface according to the destination information contained in the packet.When the packet-layer switching function is enabled, the router can serve as a smallpacket switch.

Example

! The following example enables the X.25 switching function.

Quidway(config)# x25 routing

Related Command

x25 pvc, x25 route, show x25 vc, show x25 route

4.41 x25 suppress-called-address

To omit the X.121 address of the called DTE in outgoing calls while X.25 originates thecall, use the command of x25 suppress-called-address. To disable the function, usethe no form of the command.

x25 suppress-called-address

no x25 suppress-called-address

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, the call request packet must carry the address code group. But insome occasions, the X.25 call request does not have to carry the called/calling DTEaddress in a specific network environment or as is required by the application. Thiscommand enables you to specify whether the call request sent by X.25 in the Quidwayseries of routers carries the called DTE address.



4-38

Example

! The following example suppresses or omits the called address in call request packetsent from the X.25 interface on Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 suppress-called-address

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, x25 response-called-address, x25 response-calling-address x25 , suppress-calling-address

4.42 x25 suppress-calling-address

To omit the X.121 address of the calling DTE in outgoing calls while X.25 originates thecall, use the command of x25 suppress-calling-address. To disable the function, usethe no form of the command.

x25 suppress-calling-address

no x25 suppress-calling-address

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, the call request packet must carry the address code group. But insome occasions, the X.25 call request does not have to carry the called/calling DTEaddress in a specific network environment or as is required by the application. Thiscommand enables you to specify whether the call request sent by X.25 in the Quidwayseries of routers carries the calling DTE address.

Example

! The following example suppresses or omits the calling address in call request packetsent from the X.25 interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 suppress-calling-address

Related Command

show x25 interface serial, x25 response-called-address, x25 response-calling-address x25, suppress-called-address

4.43 x25 threshold

To set the maximum number of input packets before X.25 send an acknowledgement,use the command of x25 threshold. To restore to the default value, use the no form ofthe command.



4-39

no x25 threshold count

no x25 threshold

Syntax Description

count Count of packets that can be received before the acknowledgement, ranging 0and to input windowsize. If it is set to 0 or the windowsize, this function will be disabled.If it is set to 1, X.25 of the Quidway series of routers will send an acknowledgement foreach correct packet received.

Default

0 packet.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After enabling this function, the Quidway series of routers can send acknowledgementto the remote router upon the receipt of correct packets, even if the input window is notyet full. If there is not many data traffic in your application environment, you canappropriately adjust this parameter to meet the requirement.

Example

! The following example specifies that each VC on the X.25 interface Serial0acknowledges the receipt of each correct packet.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 threshold 1

Related Command

x25 win, x25 wout

4.44 x25 tx0

To set the delay value of the X.25 restart indication retransmission timer on DTE (orDCE) devices, use the command x25 tx0. To restore to the default value, use the noform of the command.

x25 tx0 seconds

no x25 tx0

Syntax Description

seconds delay value for the X.25 restart indication retransmission timer in second.

Default

Default delay on the X.25 DTE restart timer is 180 seconds and that on the DCE timer is60 seconds.



4-40

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a restart request (or aDCE sends a restart indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after thistimer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normalproceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of thistimer before timeout.

Example

! The following example sets the timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 120seconds.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 tx0 120

Related Command

x25 tx1, x25 tx2, x25 tx3

4.45 x25 tx1

To set the delay value of Call Request Indication Retransmission timer on DTE/DCEdevices, use the command x25 tx1. To restore to the default value, use the no form ofthe command.

x25 tx1 seconds

no x25 tx1

Syntax Description

seconds delay value of Call Request Indication Retransmission timer in second.

Default

Default value for the call request retransmission timer on a DTE is 200 seconds; defaultvalue for the call request retransmission timer on a DCE is 180 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a call request (or aDCE sends a call indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after this timeris timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normalproceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of thistimer before timeout.



4-41

Example

! The following example sets the timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 100seconds.


Related Command

x25 tx0, x25 tx2, x25 tx3

4.46 x25 tx2

To set the delay value for reset indication retransmission timer on a DTE/DCE, use thecommand x25 tx2. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 tx2 seconds

no x25 tx2

Syntax Description

seconds Delay value of the reset indication retransmission timer in second.

Default

Default value for the reset request retransmission timer on a DTE is 180 seconds;default value for the reset request retransmission timer on a DCE is 60 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a reset request (or aDCE sends a reset indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after thistimer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normalproceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of thistimer before the timeout.

Example

! The following example sets the reset timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0 to 120seconds.


Related Command

x25 tx0, x25 tx1, x25 tx3



4-42

4.47 x25 tx3

To set the delay value for clear indication retransmission timer on a DTE/DCE, use thecommand x25 tx3. To restore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 tx3 seconds

no x25 tx3

Syntax Description

seconds Delay value of the clear indication retransmission timer in second.

Default

Default value for the clear indication retransmission timer on a DTE is 180 seconds;default value for the clear indication retransmission timer on a DCE is 60 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a clear request (or aDCE sends a clear indication). If no remote acknowledgement is received after thistimer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normalproceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay value of thistimer before the timeout.

Example

! The following example sets the delay value of clear indication retransmission timer onthe X.25 interface Serial0 to 100 seconds.


Related Command

x25 tx0, x25 tx1, x25 tx2

4.48 x25 use-source-address

To change the calling address as the local address while setting the call-forwardingpackets, use the command x25 use-source-address. To disable the function, use theno form of the command.

x25 use-source-address

no x25 use-source-address

Default

Disabled.



4-43

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If you connect your private X.25 data network to the X.25 public data network via theQuidway router, and if your private network has an internal private address, thisfunction is necessary. Any call originated from a host inside any private network andwhose destination is not in this private network will be forwarded to the public datanetwork. So, this call should have a legal, unified public data network address. Whenthis function is enabled, the source addresses of such calls will be replaced by theX.121 address (i.e., legal X.121 address recognized by the public data network) on theinterface of the public data network to which the Quidway router is connected. In thisway, the internetworking is implemented between the private and public data networks.

Example

! The following example enables the router work in switched mode, and all the sourceaddresses of the calls forwarded from the X.25 interface Serial0 will be replaced by012020112451.

Quidway(config)# x25 routing


Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 address 012020112451

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 use-source-address

Related Command

show x25 interface, x25 address

4.49 x25 win

To set the incoming windowsize on the X.25 interface, use the command x25 win. Torestore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 win packets

no x25 win

Syntax Description

packets size of the incoming window, ranging 1 to one less than the window modulus.(including 1 and one less than the modulus).

Default

Default incoming windowsize on the X.25 interface is 2 packets.

Command Mode




4-44

Usage Guideline

This parameter specifies the maximum count of correct packets received before X.25sends correct acknowledgement. As long as the bandwidth allows, the greater thewindowsize is, the higher the transmission efficiency.

Please consult your ISP about the incoming and outgoing windowsize. Unlesssupported by the network, do not set these two parameters to different values.

Example

! The following example sets the incoming and outgoing windowsizes on the X.25interface Serial0 to 5.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 win 5

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 wout 5

Related Command

show interface, show x25 interface serial, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 threshold, x25wout

4.50 x25 wout

To set the outgoing window size on X.25 interface, use the command x25 wout. Torestore to the default value, use the no form of the command.

x25 wout packets

no x25 wout

Syntax Description

packets size of the outgoing windowsize, ranging 1 to one less than the modulus(including 1 and one less than the modulus).

Default

Default outgoing windowsize on the X.25 interface is 2.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This parameter specifies the maximum count of correct packets received before X.25sends correct acknowledgements. As long as the bandwidth allows, the greater thewindowsize is, the higher the transmission efficiency.

Please consult your ISP about the incoming and outgoing windowsizes. Unlesssupported by the network, do not set these two parameters to the different values.



4-45

Example

! The following example sets the incoming and outgoing windowsizes on the X.25interface Serial0 to 5.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 win 5

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# x25 wout 5

Related Command

show interface, show x25 interface serial, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 threshold, x25win

4.51 show x25 alias

To configure an X.25 interface to accept all reverse charge calls, use the commandshow x25 alias.

show x25 alias

Command Mode

Privileged user mode.

Usage Guideline

This command can be used to show all the aliases set for all the X.25 interfaces.

Example

! The following example displays the X.25 alias table.

Quidway# show x25 alias Alias for Serial0: Alias for Serial1: Alias- 1: $20112405$ strict Alias- 2: $20112450 left Alias- 3: 20112450$ right

The above information indicates that, no alias is set for Serial0; 3 aliases are set forSerial1, and they are $20112405$ (matching mode: strict), $20112405 (matching mode:left alignment), and 20112405$ (matching mode: right alignment).

Related Command

show x25 interface, x25 alias

4.52 show x25 interface

To display the X.25 interface information, use the command show x25 interface.

show x25 interface serial [number]



4-46

Syntax Description

number interface serial number.

Default

If no interface serial number is specified, the information about all X.25 interfaces willbe displayed.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After configuring some X.25 parameters and attributes, or enabling or disabling someX.25 functions, you can use the command to view the result of your operation andobtain the related X.25 configuration information on this interface.

Example

! The following is sample output about X.25 interface Serial0 from the command.

Quidway# show x25 interface serial 0 Encapsulation X.25 DTE IETF, address is , state Ready, modulo 8 input/output: window sizes 2/2, packet sizes 128/128 Channels: Incoming-only 0-0, Two-way 1-1024, Outgoing-only 0-0 Timers: T20 180, T21 200, T22 180, T23 180, T28 300, Idle_Timer 0 New configuration(will be effective after restart): modulo 8 input/output: window sizes 2/2, packet sizes 128/128 Channels: Incoming-only 0-0, Two-way 1-1024, Outgoing-only 0-0

Statistic: Restarts 0 (Restart Collisions 0) Refused Incoming Call 0, Failing Outgoing Call 0 input/output: RESTART 0/0 CALL 0/0 DIAGNOSE 0/0

DATA 0/0 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0

Invalid Pr: 0 Invalid Ps: 0 Unknown: 0 LAPB DTE, module 8, k 7, N1 2104, N2 5 timer: T1 2000, T2 1000, T3 0 (milliseconds) state DISCONNECT, VS 0, VR 0, Remote VR 0 IFRAME 0/0, RR 0/0, RNR 0/0, REJ 0/0 FRMR 0/0, SABM 0/0, DM 0/0, UA 0/0 DISC 0/0, invalid ns 0, invalid nr 0, link resets 0



4-47

Table LLC-4-5 LAPB information displayed via show x25 interface command

Field MeaningEncapsulation LAPB The current encapsulation protocol on this interface is LAPB protocol.LAPB DTE This LAPB interface works in DTE mode.

module 8 The information frame and monitor frame sent by this LAPB interface isnumbered in modulo 8 mode.

k 7 The LAPB window size on this interface is 7.

N1 12032 The maximum frame size that can be sent by this LAPB interface is 12032bits.

N2 5 The maximum number of times that the LAPB information frames can beretransmitted by this interface is 5.

timer: Delay values of the LAPB timers on this interface in second.state Current state of this LAPB interface.VS Outgoing variable on this LAPB interface.VR Incoming variables on this LAPB interface.

Remote VR Final verification of remote information frame received by LAPB on thisinterface.

IFRAME 0/0 ... DISC 0/0 Statistics of frames received and transmitted on this interface; format:frames received/frames transmitted.

Invalid Ns LAPB erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming informationframes with numbering errors.

Invalid Nr LAPB erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming informationframes and monitor frames with numbering errors.

Link Resets Number of LAPB link reset times on this interface.

Table LLC-4-6 X.25 information displayed via the show x25 interface command

Field Meaning

Encapsulation X.25 DTE IETF The encapsulation protocol on this interface is X.25, which works in DTEmode; the datagram encapsulation format is IETF

address is X.121 address of this X.25 interface; if there is no such an address, thisfield is blank.

state Current state of this X.25 interface.

modulo All the data packets and traffic control packets sent from this X.25interface are numbered in modulo 8 mode

input/output: window sizes...Traffic control parameters for this X.25 interface, including the windowsize, outgoing window size, maximum incoming packet size (in byte), andmaximum outgoing packet size (in byte).

Channels:Division of channels for this X.25 interface: they are incoming-onlychannel, two-way channel, and outgoing channel. If both values of arange are 0, this area is disabled.

Timers: The delay values of the timers on this X.25 interface in second.

New ConfigurationNew configuration on this X.25 interface that will take effect when thesystem is restarted. If there is error in it, it will restore to the defaultvalues.

Restarts 0 ( Restart Collision 0) Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of restart times (including thenumber of collisions after the restart)

Refused Incoming Call Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of times for the incoming callsrefused

Failing Outgoing Call Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of outgoing calls failedInput/output: RESTART 0/0... REJ0/0

Statistics of this X.25 interface: number of packets incoming or outgoing,the format: number of incoming packets/number of outgoing packets

Invalid Ps Erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming data packetswith numbering errors.

Invalid Pr Erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming data packetsand traffic control packets with numbering errors.

Unknown Erroneous statistics on this interface: number of incoming data packetsthat cannot be resolute.



4-48

Related Command

show interface

4.53 show x25 map

To display the X.25 address maps, use the command show x25 map.

show x25 map

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The X.25 address map can be configured in two approaches: special configuration(through the x25 map command) or implied configuration (through the x25 pvccommand). The show x25 map command can be used to show all the address maps.

Example


Quidway# show x25 mapSerial0: X.121 20112450 <--> ip 202.38.165.19 SVC_MAP No VC attched Facility: ACCEPT_REVERSE; BROADCAST; PACKET_SIZE: I 512 O 512 ;

Serial1: X.121 20112451 <--> ip 202.38.166.20 PVC_MAP 1 VC: 3* Facility: BROADCAST; WINDOW_SIZE: I 5 O 5 ;The following table explains with detail the meanings of the fields inthe above address map information.

Table LLC-4-7 X.25 address map information

Field MeaningSerial0 Name of the X.25 interface on which this map is configuredX.121 20112451 X.121 address of the destination of this address map

ip 202.38.165.19 Protocol type and address of the destination of the higher-level protocol mapped to theremote host

SVC_MAP Type of this address map: SVC_MAP stands for a SVC address map; PVC_MAPstands for a PVC address map.

1 VC: 3* There is only one virtual circuit related with this address map, whose number is 3; ifthere is no virtual circuit attach to this address map, this field is set to “No VC attached”

Facility Option for this address map. For example, “Broadcast” means that “broadcast enabledvia this address map”

Related Command

x25 map, x25 pvc, show x25 interface



4-49

4.54 show x25 switch-vc-table

To display the X.25 SVC table, use the command show x25 switch-vc-table.

show x25 switch-vc-table

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used for displaying the condition of the X.25 switched virtual circuit.

Example


Quidway(config)# show x25 switch-vc-table# 1 (In: Serial0-vc1024) (Out: Serial1-vc1)# 2 (In: Serial1-vc1024) (Out: Serial0-vc1)

The above information indicates that there are two records in the current switchedvirtual circuit:

in from virtual circuit 1024 on Serial0, and out from virtual circuit 1 on interfaceSerial1.

in from virtual circuit 1024 on Serial1, and out from virtual circuit 1 on interfaceSerial0.

Related Command

x25 pvc, x25 route

4.55 show x25 route

To display the X.25 routing table, use the command show x25 route.

show x25 route

Command Mode

Privileged user mode, global configuration mode, interface configuration mode, routingprotocol configuration mode, etc.

Usage Guideline

Information shown via this command includes: virtual circuit number and its switchinterface.

Example


Quidway(config)# show X25 routeNumber X.121 CUD FowardTo



4-50

# 1 1 Serial0 # 2 2 Serial1

The above information indicates that, the call whose destination X.121 is 1 will beswitched to Serial0 for an output, and the call whose destination X.121 address is 2 willbe switched to Serial1 for an output.

Related Command

show x25 interface, x25 routing, x25 pvc, x25 route

4.56 show x25 vc

To display information about the X.25 virtual circuit, use the command show x25 vc.

show x25 vc [ lcn ]

Syntax Description

lcn logic channel number.

Default

If no logic channel number is specified, all the virtual circuits will be displayed.

Command Mode

Privileged user mode, global configuration mode, interface configuration mode, routingprotocol configuration mode, etc.

Usage Guideline

SVC (switched virtual circuit) is set up temporarily by X.25 through call connectionwhen data transmission is required. PVC is configured manually, and exists regardlessof the data transmission requirement. When the router works in X.25 switched mode,virtual circuits will be set up for transmission of the switched data. The informationabout these virtual circuits can be shown via this command, only some fields in thedisplayed information differ.

Example


Quidway# show x25 vcSVC 1, State:TRANSFER, Interface: Serial0 Started: 1998-1-1 1:48:11, Last input: 0:45:57, Last output: 0:45:59 Connects: X.121 20112450 <--> ip 202.38.165.19 Window size: input 5 output 5 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 PS: 0 PR: 0 ACK: 0 Remote PR: 0 RCNT: 0 RNR: FALSE Reset times: 0 input/output: DATA 1154/1022 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 1569732/1435638 RR 143/165 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Snd Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0 Rcv Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0

PVC 3, State:TRANSFER, Interface: Serial1 ed: 1998-1-1 1:48:11, Last input: 0:30:09, Last output: 0:30:17 Connects: X.121 20112451 <--> ip 202.38.166.20



4-51

Window size: input 5 output 5 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 PS: 0 PR: 0 ACK: 0 Remote PR: 0 RCNT: 0 RNR: FALSE Reset times: 0 input/output: DATA 0/0 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Snd Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0 Rcv Queue: Current length 0 Max length 50 Drops 0

The above information indicates that: on the X.25 interface Serial0, there exists a SVCwhose number is 1; on the X.25 interface Serial1, there exists a PVC whose number is3. The following table offers the description of the fields in the above information:

Table LLC-4-8 Information about X.25 virtual circuit

Field Meaning

SVC 1 The type and number of the virtual circuit. SVC stands for the switched virtual circuit, andPVC for the permanent virtual circuit

State Current state of the virtual circuitInterface Name of the interface on which the virtual circuit is establishedStarted Time elapsed since the VC was created. Format: : year-month-day hour: minute: second

Last input Time of last input (when the show x25 vc is executed) on the virtual circuit. Format: hour:minute: second

Last output Shows time of the last output (when the show x25 vc is executed) on the virtual circuit.Format: hour: minute: second

Connects

If the router is the start / end point (that is, the router does not work in X.25 switchedmode), this field indicates the address map attached to this virtual circuit. If the virtualcircuit is set up for switching (that is, the router works in switched mode), this fielddescribes the type and number of the VC on another X.25 interface attached to this VC.For example, “Serial1 SVC 1024” indicates that this VC is attached to SVC1024 on theX.25 interface Serial1

Window size The incoming window size and outgoing window size of this VCPacket size The maximum packet size of this VCVs Variable currently sent on this VCVr Variable current received on this VCACK Current acknowledgement variable on this VCRemote Vr Last acknowledgement from the far end on this VCRCNT Count of unacknowledged output packets

RNR If this VC is in the “Receiver Not Ready” status. TRUE indicate that it is in this status, andFALSE indicates that it is not in this status

Reset times Number of VC reset timesinput/output:DATA...REJ 0/0

Statistics about this VC, including the input and output packets, and the total bytes of allthe data packets

Snd Queue Current status of the output queue of this VC: maximum hold size, current queue length,and packets dropped due to a full queue

Rcv Queue Current status of the input queue of this VC: maximum hold size, current queue length,and packets dropped due to a full queue

Related Command

clear x25 vc, show x25 interface serial, x25 pvc

4.57 debug x25 xot

To enable the XOT debugging information output, use the command debug x25 xot[ all | event | packet ]

debug x25 xot [ all | event | packet ]



4-52

Syntax Description

all Enable all the XOT debugging information output.

event Enable the XOT event debugging information output.

packet Enable the XOT packet debugging information output.

Default

Disable all the XOT debugging information output.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After enabling the XOT packet debugging information output, all the packets receivedand sent by XOT will be output. After enabling the XOT event debugging informationoutput, all the XOT events will be output.

Example

! Enable all the XOT debugging information output.

Quidway# debug x25 xot all

Related Command

debug all show debugging logging on logging console


Chapter 5Frame Relay Commands

5-1

Chapter 5 Frame Relay Commands

Frame relay commands include: clear frame-relay-inarp encapsulation frame-relay frame-relay interface-dlci frame-relay intf-type frame-relay inverse-arp frame-relay ip tcp header-compress frame-relay local-dlci frame-relay lmi-n391dte frame-relay lmi-n392dce frame-relay lmi-n392dte frame-relay lmi-n393dce frame-relay lmi-n393dte frame-relay lmi-t391dte frame-relay lmi-t392dce frame-relay lmi-type frame-relay map frame-relay route frame-relay switching show frame-relay lmi show frame-relay map show frame-relay packet show frame-relay pvc show frame-relay route show frame-relay status show frame-relay traffic debug frame-traffic

5.1 clear frame-relay-inarp

To clear all the Frame Relay maps created by the use of Inverse Address ResolutionProtocol, use the clear frame-relay-inarp command.

clear frame-relay-inarp

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In some special circumstances, the change of the network architecture will cause thefailure of the dynamic Frame Relay map that originally created and it is necessary tocreate it again. You can use this command to clear all the dynamically created maps.

Example

! The following example clears all the dynamic frame relay maps.



5-2

Quidway# clear frame-relay-inarp

Related Command

frame-relay inverse-arp

5.2 encapsulation frame-relay

To enable Frame Relay encapsulation, use the encapsulation frame-relay Interfaceconfiguration command.

encapsulation frame-relay [ ietf | cisco-compatible ]

Syntax Description

ietf Sets the encapsulation method to comply with the Internet Engineering Task Force(IETF) standard. This is the default encapsulation.

cisco-compatible Sets the encapsulation method to comply with Cisco.

Default

Default link-layer protocol encapsulation on the interface is PPP. Default frame-relayprotocol encapsulation is IETF.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In the Quidway series of routers, the frame relay encapsulation can either be the IETFor cisco-compatible. IETF encapsulation conforms with RFC1294, that is, supportIETF standard; cisco-compatible encapsulation method is the same as that used inthe Cisco router.

Example

! The following example configures Frame Relay encapsulation on interface Serial0and the default ietf encapsulation is used.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation frame-relay

Related Command

show interface

5.3 frame-relay interface-dlci

To assign a data link connection identifier to a specified Frame Relay main interface orsub-interface, use frame-relay interface-dlci Interface configuration command. Toremove this assignment, use the no form of this command.

frame-relay interface-dlci dlci



5-3

no frame-relay interface-dlci dlci

Syntax Description

dlci DLCI number to be used on the specified FR main interface or sub-interface.

Command Mode


Default

No DLCI is assigned.

Usage Guideline

Functionally this command is similar to the frame-relay local-dlci command, with thedifference that frame-relay local-dlci can only specify a DLCI for the main interfacewhile frame-relay interface-dlci can specify a DLCI for both the main interface andsub-interface. While configuring the frame relay main interface, you only specify theDLCIs at the DCE side. While configuring the frame relay sub-interface, you mustspecify the DLCIs at the DCE and DTE sides at the same time

Example

! The following example assigns a DLCI 100 to Frame Relay sub-interface Serial0.1.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0.1)# frame-relay interface-dlci 100

Related Command

encapsulation frame-relay

5.4 frame-relay intf-type

To set the Frame Relay terminal type, use the frame-relay intf-type. To restore to thedefault Frame Relay terminal type, use the no form of the command.

frame-relay intf-type { dte | dce | nni }

no frame-relay intf-type

Syntax Description

dte, dce and nni are three FR operations.

Default

DTE

Command Mode




5-4

Usage Guideline

In frame relay, there are two communicating parties, namely, the user side and networkside. The user side is called data terminal equipment (DTE), and the network side iscalled as data communications equipment (DCE). The frame relay interface of theQuidway series of routers can either work in DTE mode or DCE mode.

If two routers are connected back to back, then one is DCE, and the other is DTE. If arouter is connected to the frame relay switch, then the router should work in DTE mode.

If a certain frame relay interface is required to support the PVC switch, it is thennecessary to set the operation mode of this interface to NNI, and the correspondinginterface at the remote router should be set to NNI accordingly.

Note that, to configure DCE or NNI, you first need to enable the frame-relay switchingin Global configuration.

Example

! The following example configures the frame relay interface Serial0 working in the DCEmode.

Quidway(config)# frame-relay switching


Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dce

Related Command

encapsulation frame-relay, frame-relay switching

5.5 frame-relay inverse-arp

To dynamically enable the Inverse Address Resolution Protocol, use frame-relayinverse-arp command. To disable the use of protocol, use the no form of thecommand.

frame-relay inverse-arp [ ip | ipx ] [ dlci ]

no frame-relay inverse-arp [ ip | ipx ] [ dlci ]

Syntax Description

ip IP is supported for inverse address resolution .

ipx IPX is supported for inverse address resolution .

dlci data link connection identifier number, indicating that inverse addressresolution is performed for this DLCI number only.

Default

Disabled.

Command Mode




5-5

Usage Guideline

When frame relay sends data over the interface, it is also necessary to map thenetwork address to the DLCI numbers. Such a map can be specified manually or canbe completed via the function of automatic inverse address resolution.

Example

! The following example enable inverse address resolution only on IP at the frame relaymain interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay inverse-arp ip

Related Command

frame-relay map, clear frame-relay inverse-arp, show frame-relay map

5.6 frame-relay ip tcp header-compress

To enable the compression of TCP/IP packet header, use the command frame-relay iptcp header-compress. To disable the compression of TCP/IP packet header, use noform of the command.

frame-relay ip tcp header-compress [ passive ]

no frame-relay ip tcp header-compress

Syntax Description

passive Passive compression mode will be used on the interface.

Default

Active header compression

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

TCP/IP header compression is supported by frame relay protocol. Only when theFrame Relay encapsulation is cisco-compatible can TCP/IP header compression beenabled. TCP/IP header compression can either be specified on an interface or bespecified when configuring the static mapping.

Example

! The following example configures serial interface0 to use the passive TCP/IP headercompression.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay ip tcp head-compress passive



5-6

5.7 frame-relay lmi-n391dte

To set a PVC status counter, use the command frame-relay lmi-n391dte. To restore tothe default value of PVC status counter, use the no form of the command.

frame-relay lmi-n391dte n391-value

no frame-relay lmi-n391dte n391-value

Syntax Description

n391-value counter value of the PVC status. Acceptable value is a positive integer inthe range of 1 through 10.

Default

Default is 3 errors.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet set by T391 at regular interval to the DCE.There are two types of Status-Enquiry packets: link integrity authentication packet andlink status enquiry packet. The N391 parameter defines the ratio of the two outgoingpackets, that is, link integrity authentication packets: link status enquiry packets =(N391-1): 1.

Example

! The following example sets DTE as the operation on frame relay interface Serial0, andthe counter value of the PVC status request to 8.


Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay intf-type dte

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n391dte 8

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-t391dte

5.8 frame-relay lmi-n392dce

To set LMI error threshold on a DCE, use the command frame-relay lmi-n392dce. Toremove the current setting, use the no form of the command.

frame-relay lmi-n392dce n392dce-value

frame-relay lmi-n392dce



5-7

Syntax Description

n392dce-value LMI error threshold on a DCE. Acceptable value is a positive integer inthe range of 1 through 10.

Default


Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at regular interval (decidedby T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet, it will record the errorby adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, the DCE would declarethe physical channels and all the DLCI to be down.

N392 and N393 together, define the “error threshold”. N393 indicates the event countobserved and N392 indicates the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, iferror count that occurred to the DEC is up to N392 in N393 time intervals, DCE willconsider the errors have exceeded the threshold and declare the physical channelsand all DLCIs to be down.

N392 should be less than N393.

Example

! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DCEmode and sets N392 to 4.





Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n393dce 4

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n393dce


To set the error threshold on a DTE, use the command frame-relay lmi-n392dte. Toremove the current setting, use the no form of the command.

frame-relay lmi-n392dte n392dte-value

no frame-relay lmi-n392dte



5-8

Syntax Description

n392dte-value LMI error threshold on a DTE. Acceptable value is a positive integer inthe range of 1 through 10.

Default


Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set by T392) to the DCE.On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a Status-Enquiry packet. If theDCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet in the specified time, it will record theerror by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, then the DCE willdeclare the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be down.

N392 and N393 together, define the “error threshold”. N393 defines the event countobserved and N392 defines the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, ifN392 errors occur to N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DEC, the DCE will considerthat the error count reached the threshold and declares physical channels and allDLCIs to be down.


Example

! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DTEmode and sets N392 to 5.




Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n393dte

5.10 frame-relay lmi-n393dce

To set the LMI event counter value on a DCE, use the command frame-relay lmi-n393dce. To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command.

frame-relay lmi-n393dce n393dce-value

no frame-relay lmi-n393dce

Syntax Description

n393dce-value LMI event counter value on a DCE. Acceptable value is a positiveinteger in the range of 1 through 10.



5-9

Default


Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set byT392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet, it will record the error byadding 1 to the error count. If the errors reach the threshold, the DCE would declarethat the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be down.

N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 defines the event countobserved and N392 defines the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, iferror count that occurred to the DEC is up to N392 in N393 time intervals, DCE willconsider the errors have exceeded the threshold and declare the physical channelsand all DLCIs to be down.


Example

! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DCEmode and sets N393 to 4.





Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-n393dce 4

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n393dce


To set the LMI event counter value on a DtE, use the command frame-relay lmi-n393dte. To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command.

frame-relay lmi-n393dte n393-value

no frame-relay lmi-n393dte

Syntax Description

n393dte-value LMI event counter value on a DTE. Acceptable value is a positiveinteger in the range of 1 through 10.



5-10

Default


Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set by T392) to the DCEto inquire the link status. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send aStatus-Response packet. If the DCE does not receive the acknowledgement in thespecified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors reachthe threshold, the DTE will declare that the physical channels and all the DLCIs to bedown.

N392 and N393 together, define the “error threshold”. N393 indicates the event countobserved and N392 indicates the error threshold in the event count observed. That is, ifN392 errors occur to N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DCE, the DCE wouldconsider that the error count reached the threshold and declare the physical channelsand all DLCIs to be down.


Example

! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DTEmode and sets N393 to 5.




Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-n392dte

5.12 frame-relay lmi-t391dte

To set the polling timer value on a DTE, use the command frame-relay lmi-t391dte. Toremove the current setting, use the no form of this command.

frame-relay lmi-t391dte t391dte-value

frame-relay lmi-t391dte

Syntax Description

t391dte-value value of the polling timer. It can be a value in the range of 5s through30s.

Default

15s.



5-11

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This parameter defines the time interval for DTE sending the Status-Enquiry packet.

Example

! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DTE andsets T391 to 15 seconds.



Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-t391dte 15

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-t392dce

5.13 frame-relay lmi-t392dce

To set the polling timer value on a DCE, use the command frame-relay lmi-t392dce.To remove the current setting, use the no form of this command.

frame-relay lmi-t392dce t392-value

no frame-relay lmi-t392dce

Syntax Description

t392dce-value value of the polling timer on a DCE. It can be a value in the range of 5sthrough 30s.

Default

15s.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This parameter defines the maximum time for DCE waiting for a Status-Enquiry, whereT392 should be greater than T391.

Example

! The following example sets the operation of frame relay interface Serial0 as DCEmode and set T392 to 16s.




5-12

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-t392dce 15

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type, frame-relay lmi-t391dte

5.14 frame-relay lmi-type

To select the LMI type, use the command frame-relay lmi-type. To return to the defaultLMI type, use the no form of the command.

frame-relay lmi-type { cisco-compatible | ansi | q933a }

frame-relay lmi-type

Syntax Description

cisco-compatible LMI type compatible with the Cisco standard.

ansi Annex D defined by ANSI T1.617.

q933a ITU-T Q.933 Annex A.

Default

q933a .

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The Quidway series of routers usually supports three LMI protocols, that is, Q.933Annex A, Annex D of ANSI T1.617 and CISCO-compatible LMI.

Example

! The following example sets the FR LIMI type of Serial0 to Q.933 Annex A.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay lmi-type q933a

Related Command

show interface

5.15 frame-relay local-dlci

To set a DLCI number for Frame Relay main interface, use frame-relay local-dlcicommand. To delete a DLCI number for Frame Relay main interface, use the no form ofthe command.

frame-relay local-dlci dlci

no frame-relay local-dlci dlci



5-13

Syntax Description

dlci Local DLCI number of the Frame Relay main interface.

Default

No DLCI number is set.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The FR DLCi is determined at the DCE side, so it is unnecessary to configure thisparameter at the DTE side.

Example

! The following example specifies the FR interface operation as DCE and the DLCInumber as 100 and 200





Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay local-dlci 100

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay local-dlci 200

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type

5.16 frame-relay map

To add an entry of FR static mapping, use frame-relay map. Use the no form of thecommand to delete an entry.

frame-relay map { ip | ipx } protocol-address dlci [ broadcast ] [ cisco-compatible |ietf ] [ lin logical-number ] [ nocompress | tcp header-compress [ active | passive ] ]

no frame-relay map { ip | ipx } protocol-address dlci

Syntax Description

ip and ipx Frame Relay supported network protocol.

protocol-address Destination protocol address.

dlci DLCI number used to connect to.

Broadcast broadcast is supported.



5-14

cisco-compatible FR interface encapsulation is compatible with that of Cisco

ietf FR interface encapsulation adopts the ietf method

lin logical-number Indicate where the logical channel the interface is attached

nocompress Prohibit the interface to use the TCP/IP header compression

tcp header-compress active Active header compression is used

tcp header-compress passive Passive header compression is used

Default

Dynamic inverse address resolution enabled.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The mapping can be manually created or can be completed via the inverse addressresolution protocol. Manually configure the static mapping when there are few remotehosts or there is a default route. When the remote router supports inverse addressresolution protocol and the network is rather complex, dynamically create the mappingvia the inverse address resolution protocol.

Example

! The following example maps the destination IP address of the router 202.38.163.252to local interface serial0. There is a DLCI = 50 on local Serial0 connected to this router.Configure the static mapping:

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# frame-relay map ip 202.38.163.252 50

Related Command

show frame-relay map, frame-relay inverse-arp

5.17 frame-relay route

To configure Frame Relay route for PVC switching, use the command frame-relayroute. To remove the route, use the no form of the command.

frame-relay route in-dlci interface serial number out-dlci

no frame-relay route in-dlci

Syntax Description

in-dlci DLCI on which the packet is received on the interface

number interface number of packet forwarded by a router

out-dlci DLCI on which the packet is forwarded by a router on the specified interface.



5-15

Default

No route is specified.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Before the static route of FR PVC is configured, it is necessary to enable the FR PVCswitching first by using the command frame-relay switching.

Example

! The following example configures a static route that allows packets in DLCI 100 onSeiral1 and transmits packets out over DLCI 200 on interface Serial2.Quidway(config-if-Serial1)# frame-relay route 100 interface Serial2 200

Related Command

show frame-relay route, frame-relay switching

5.18 frame-relay switching

To enable PVC switching on a frame relay DCE or an NNI interface, use the commandframe-relay switching. Use the no form of the command to disable switching.

frame-relay switching

no frame-relay switching

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Quidway series of routers can be used as Frame Relay switch and perform FR PVCswitching. After enabling PVC switching on a frame relay DCE or an NNI interface, it isnecessary to configure a route for PVC switching.

Example

! The following example enables PVC switching on FR interface.


Related Command

frame-relay route



5-16

5.19 show frame-relay lmi

To display statistics about the Q.933, use the command show frame-relay lmi.

show frame-relay lmi

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The Q.933 signaling frame is used to maintain the current frame relay link, including thestatus enquiry packet and status packet. Such information helps the user to diagnosethe fault.

Example

! The following is sample output from the command show frame-relay lmi.

Quidway# show frame-relay lmiLMI Statistics for Serial0(interface type: DTE)100 status enquiry sent, 100 status received0 status discarded, 0 status timeouts

The above information indicates that: The terminal type of the FR encapsulation on thisserial interface is DTE. 100 “Status Enquiry” packet have been sent and 100 “Status”packets are received. No “Status Packet” is dropped and there is no timeout for waitingfor the “Status Packet”.

Related Command

frame-relay intf-type

5.20 show frame-relay map

To display the current FR mapping table, use the command show frame-relay map.

show frame-relay map

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The displayed information of the command indicates whether the static mappingconfigured by the user is correct and whether the dynamic mapping operates normally.

Example


Quidway# show frame-relay mapSerial0(protocol is down): ip 1.1.1.1 100, static



5-17

ip 2.2.2.2 200, dynamicThe above information indicates that: the FR protocol status on this serial interface hasnot yet been enabled. There are two IP addresses maps to the DLCI: one is themanually configured mapping from 1.1.1.1 to 100, and the other is the automaticallygenerated mapping from 2.2.2.2 to 200.

Table LLC-5-1 Information in frame relay address map

Field Meaningstatic The mapping relation is manually configured.dynamic The mapping relation is automatically generated via the inverse address resolution protocol.

Related Command

frame-relay map, frame-relay inverse-arp

5.21 show frame-relay packet

To display the Frame Relay statistics about the incoming and outgoing packets, use thecommand show frame-relay packet.

show frame-relay packet

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The output information of this command can help the user to make FR traffic statistics,fault diagnosis, etc.

Example


Quidway# show frame-relay packetFrame-relay packet statistics for interface Serial0:7001 packet input, 96848 bytes7001 packet output, 91013 bytes3 input error, 0 output error

The above information indicates that: this interface has received 7001 incomingpackets and 96848 bytes and transmitted out 7001 outgoing packets and 91013 bytes.3 errors are received and no errors have been made while transmitting packets.

Related Command

show interface

5.22 show frame-relay pvc

To display the FR PVC table, use the command show frame-relay pvc.



5-18

show frame-relay pvc

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command displays the statistics of the FR PVC status and incoming/outgoing dataon this VC.

Example


Quidway# show frame-relay pvcSerial0 Frame Relay DTE statistics: DLCI=100, status=ACTIVE FECNs=0, BECNs=0, RecvFrames=3, RecvOctets=90, SentFrames=0, SentOctets=0

The above information indicates that: this interface works in frame relay DTE mode.DLCI= 100 is up. No “forward explicit congestion notification” and backward explicitcongestion notification” received on this DLCI. Three frames with 90 bytes arereceived. There is no outgoing frame. Their meanings are given in the following table.

Table LLC-5-2 Information in frame relay PVC

Field MeaningDLCI Data link connection identifierstatus DLCI statusFECNs Number of “Forward explicit congestion notifications” receivedBECNs Number of “Backward explicit congestion notifications” receivedRecvFrames Number of frames receivedRecvOctets Number of octets receivedSentFrames Number of frames sentSentOctets Number of octets sent

Related Command

frame-relay local-dlci

5.23 show frame-relay route

To display all the configured FR routes along with their status, use the command showframe-relay route.

show frame-relay route

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Users can use the command to check if frame relay routes are correctly configured.



5-19

Example


Quidway# show frame-relay routeInput Intf Input Dlci Output Intf Output Dlci Status Serial1 100 Serial2 200 active Serial1 101 Serial2 201 active Serial1 102 Serial2 202 active Serial1 103 Serial3 203 inactive Serial2 200 Serial1 100 active Serial2 201 Serial1 101 active Serial2 202 Serial1 102 active Serial3 203 Serial1 103 inactive

The description of the fields is as follows:

Table LLC-5-3 Frame relay routing table description

Field DescriptionInput Intf input interface and unitInput DlCI input DLCI numberOutput Intf output interface and unitOutput DlCI output DLCI numberStatus status of the connection

Related Command

frame-relay route

5.24 show frame-relay status

To display the FR status on each interface, use the command show frame-relaystatus.

show frame-relay status

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command can output the FR protocol status on each interface, which is helpful forthe users to make fault diagnosis.

Example


Quidway# show frame-relay statusSerial 0 Current Status: DOWNSerial 1 Current Status: UP

The above information indicates that: the FR interface Serial0 is DOWN and Serial1 isUP. Their meanings are given in the following table.



5-20

Table LLC-5-4 FR protocol status information on the interface

Field DescriptionUP Connected with the remote end and the link layer already enabledDOWN Link-layer is not enabled yet.

Related Command

show interface

5.25 show frame-relay traffic

To display the packet statistics of the FR Inverse Address Resolution Protocol, use thecommand, show frame-relay traffic.

show frame-relay traffic

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The packets of FR inverse ARP include address resolution request packet and addressresolution response packet. According to the output information of this command, theuser can diagnose if the inverse address resolution protocol operates normally.

Example


Quidway# show frame-relay trafficARP request sent 0 ARP replies sent 0ARP request recvd 0 ARP replies recvd 0

The above information indicates that no address resolution request packet and addressresolution response packet are received or sent.

Related Command

frame-relay inverse-arp

5.26 debug frame-relay

To enable the information-debugging of FR packets, use the command debug frame-relay.

debug frame-relay { all | arp | event | lmi | packet } [ interface type number ]

Syntax Description

all Enable on the FR information-debugging.

arp Enable the FR address resolution information-debugging.



5-21

event Enable the FR event information-debugging.

lmi Enable the LMI protocol information-debugging.

packet Enable the FR data packet information-debugging.

interface type number Enable the FR packet information-debugging of a specifiedinterface.

Command Mode



Chapter 6HDLC Commands

6-1

Chapter 6 HDLC Commands

HDLC configuration commands include: encapsulation hdlc keepalive debug hdlc

6.1 encapsulation hdlc

To specify the interface link-layer protocol encapsulation as HDLC, use the commandencapsulation hdlc.

encapsulation hdlc

Default

Default is PPP protocol.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The command will apply HDLC protocol encapsulation on the interface.

Example

! The following example configures HDLC encapsulate on interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# encapsulation hdlc

Related Command

show interface

6.2 keepalive

To set the keepalive interval, use the command keepalive. Use the no form to disablekeepalive.

keepalive seconds

no keepalive

Syntax Description

seconds keepalive interval value. The interval must be set as a positive integer that isin the range of 0 through 32767. 0 indicates that the keepalive function is disabled.


Chapter 6HDLC Commands

6-2

Default

10 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Two routers interconnected should have the same keepalive interval value. If they havetwo values greatly different, the router with the smaller value will send the keepaliveframes several times consecutively. After that, if this router still cannot receive thekeepalive frame of the opposite router, the protocol will declare “down” status.

Example

! The following example sets the keepalive interval value on interface Serial0 as 100seconds.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# keepalive 100

Related Command

show interface

6.3 debug hdlc

To enable the information-debugging of HDLC packets, use the command debug hdlc.

debug hdlc { all | event | packet } [ interface type number ]

Syntax Description

all Enable all the HDLC information-debugging.

event Enable the HDLC event information-debugging.

packet Enable the HDLC data packet information-debugging.

interface type number Enable the HDLC packet information-debugging of a specifiedinterface.

Command Mode


HUAWEI®


04 – Network Protocol Configuration (NC)


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands...................................................................... 1-11.1 IP Address Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 ip address............................................................................................................... 1-11.1.2 ip address negotiate............................................................................................... 1-21.1.3 hostname................................................................................................................ 1-31.1.4 ip unnumbered ....................................................................................................... 1-31.1.5 show hostname ...................................................................................................... 1-41.1.6 show ip interface .................................................................................................... 1-5

1.2 ARP Configuration Commands......................................................................................... 1-51.2.1 arp .......................................................................................................................... 1-51.2.2 clear arp-cache....................................................................................................... 1-61.2.3 show arp................................................................................................................. 1-71.2.4 debug arp ............................................................................................................... 1-7

1.3 Proxy ARP Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-71.3.1 ip proxy-arp ............................................................................................................ 1-8

1.4 DNS Configuration Commands ........................................................................................ 1-81.4.1 host......................................................................................................................... 1-81.4.2 show host ............................................................................................................... 1-9

1.5 NAT Configuration Commands......................................................................................... 1-91.5.1 nat clear................................................................................................................ 1-101.5.2 nat inside interface ............................................................................................... 1-101.5.3 nat inside pool ...................................................................................................... 1-111.5.4 nat pool................................................................................................................. 1-111.5.5 nat server ............................................................................................................. 1-121.5.6 nat timeout............................................................................................................ 1-131.5.7 show nat ............................................................................................................... 1-141.5.8 debug nat ............................................................................................................. 1-14

1.6 DHCP Configuration Commands.................................................................................... 1-151.6.1 ip forward-protocol udp ........................................................................................ 1-151.6.2 ip helper-address ................................................................................................. 1-151.6.3 show ip forward-protocol ...................................................................................... 1-161.6.4 show ip helper-address ........................................................................................ 1-161.6.5 debug forward-protocol ........................................................................................ 1-17

1.7 VLAN configuration commands ...................................................................................... 1-171.7.1 encapsulation dot1q ............................................................................................. 1-171.7.2 interface ethernet ................................................................................................. 1-181.7.3 show vlan ............................................................................................................. 1-18


ii

Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands.............................................................. 2-12.1 clear ip counters................................................................................................................ 2-12.2 ifquelen arp ....................................................................................................................... 2-12.3 ifquelen interface .............................................................................................................. 2-22.4 ifquelen ip.......................................................................................................................... 2-32.5 ifquelen ipx........................................................................................................................ 2-32.6 ip route-cache ................................................................................................................... 2-42.7 ip tcp header-compression ............................................................................................... 2-42.8 mtu .................................................................................................................................... 2-52.9 tcp finwait-time.................................................................................................................. 2-62.10 tcp synwait-time .............................................................................................................. 2-72.11 tcp window-size............................................................................................................... 2-72.12 show ip cache ................................................................................................................. 2-82.13 show ip interface............................................................................................................. 2-92.14 show ip traffic .................................................................................................................. 2-92.15 show tcp brief................................................................................................................ 2-10

Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands................................................................................... 3-13.1 clear ipx counters.............................................................................................................. 3-13.2 ipx default-route ................................................................................................................ 3-23.3 ipx delay............................................................................................................................ 3-23.4 ipx encapsulation .............................................................................................................. 3-33.5 ipx gns-reply-disable......................................................................................................... 3-33.6 ipx gns-round-robin........................................................................................................... 3-43.7 ipx max-paths.................................................................................................................... 3-43.8 ipx max-reserve-paths ...................................................................................................... 3-53.9 ipx max-reserve-servers ................................................................................................... 3-63.10 ipx network...................................................................................................................... 3-73.11 ipx rip-max-packetsize .................................................................................................... 3-83.12 ipx rip-multiplier............................................................................................................... 3-83.13 ipx rip-update-time .......................................................................................................... 3-93.14 ipx route ........................................................................................................................ 3-103.15 ipx routing ..................................................................................................................... 3-113.16 ipx sap........................................................................................................................... 3-123.17 ipx sap-max-packetsize ................................................................................................ 3-133.18 ipx sap-multiplier ........................................................................................................... 3-143.19 ipx sap-update-time ...................................................................................................... 3-143.20 ipx type-20-propagation ................................................................................................ 3-153.21 ipx split-horizon............................................................................................................. 3-163.22 ipx touch-off .................................................................................................................. 3-163.23 show ipx interface ......................................................................................................... 3-163.24 show ipx route............................................................................................................... 3-183.25 show ipx servers ........................................................................................................... 3-20


iii

3.26 show ipx traffic .............................................................................................................. 3-21

Chapter 4 DLSw Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 4-14.1 clear dlsw bridge-entry...................................................................................................... 4-14.2 clear dlsw circuits.............................................................................................................. 4-24.3 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)........................................................ 4-24.4 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)........................................................ 4-34.5 dlsw bridge-group (synchronous interface configuration)................................................. 4-34.6 dlsw disable ...................................................................................................................... 4-44.7 dlsw local-peer tcp ............................................................................................................ 4-44.8 dlsw remote-peer tcp ........................................................................................................ 4-54.9 dlsw timer.......................................................................................................................... 4-64.10 encapsulation sdlc .......................................................................................................... 4-74.11 idle-mark ......................................................................................................................... 4-74.12 llc2 ack-delay-time .......................................................................................................... 4-84.13 llc2 ack-max.................................................................................................................... 4-84.14 llc2 local-window............................................................................................................. 4-94.15 llc2 modulus .................................................................................................................. 4-104.16 llc2 N2 ........................................................................................................................... 4-104.17 llc2 t1-time..................................................................................................................... 4-114.18 llc2 tbusy-time............................................................................................................... 4-114.19 llc2 tpf-time.................................................................................................................... 4-124.20 llc2 trej-time................................................................................................................... 4-124.21 llc2 txq-max................................................................................................................... 4-134.22 sdlc address.................................................................................................................. 4-134.23 sdlc holdq...................................................................................................................... 4-144.24 sdlc k............................................................................................................................. 4-144.25 sdlc modulus ................................................................................................................. 4-154.26 sdlc n1........................................................................................................................... 4-154.27 sdlc n2........................................................................................................................... 4-164.28 sdlc partner ................................................................................................................... 4-164.29 sdlc poll-pause-timer..................................................................................................... 4-174.30 sdlc saps ....................................................................................................................... 4-174.31 sdlc simultaneous ......................................................................................................... 4-184.32 sdlc T1 .......................................................................................................................... 4-184.33 sdlc T2 .......................................................................................................................... 4-194.34 sdlc xid .......................................................................................................................... 4-204.35 sdlc role......................................................................................................................... 4-204.36 sdlc vmac...................................................................................................................... 4-214.37 show dlsw bridge-entry ................................................................................................. 4-214.38 show dlsw capabilities .................................................................................................. 4-224.39 show dlsw circuits ......................................................................................................... 4-234.40 show dlsw peers ........................................................................................................... 4-23


iv

4.41 show dlsw reachability .................................................................................................. 4-244.42 debug dlsw.................................................................................................................... 4-244.43 debug sllc...................................................................................................................... 4-25


Chapter 1IP Address Configuration Commands

1-1

Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands

1.1 IP Address Configuration Commands ip address ip address negotiate hostname ip unnumbered show hostname show ip interface

1.1.1 ip address

To set a primary or secondary IP address for an interface, use the ip addresscommand. To remove an IP address or disable IP processing, use the no form of thiscommand.

ip address ip-address mask [ secondary ]

no ip address [ ip-address ]

Syntax Description

ip-address IP address.

net-mask mask for the associated IP subnet. It is all in decimal format divided by dots.If there is no ip-address in the command no ip address, delete all the ip-address of theinterface.

secondary specifies that the configured address is a secondary IP address. If thiskeyword is omitted, the configured address is the primary IP address.

Default

No IP address is defined for the interface

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

An interface can have one primary IP address and multiple secondary IP addresses.Packets generated by the software always use the primary IP address. Therefore, allrouters and access servers on a segment should share the same primary networknumber.

Hosts can determine subnet masks using the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)Mask Request message. Routers respond to this request with an ICMP Mask Replymessage.



1-2

You can disable IP processing on a particular interface by removing its IP address withthe no ip address command. If the software detects another host using one of its IPaddresses, it will print an error message on the console.

The optional keyword secondary allows you to specify an unlimited number ofsecondary addresses. Secondary addresses are treated like primary addresses,except the system never generates datagrams other than routing updates withsecondary source addresses. IP broadcasts and ARP requests are handled properly,as are interface routes in the IP routing table.

Normally, an interface has an IP address. In order for one interface of the router tointerconnect with multiple nets, an interface can have multiple IP addresses. One ofthem is the main IP address, and the others are secondary IP addresses. Following isthe relationship between the main and secondary IP addresses during theirconfiguration:

If the interface already has an IP address when the main IP address is configured,then the existing IP address should be deleted. The first IP address automaticallybecomes the main IP address according to the time sequence

If there is no IP address when the secondary IP address is configured, thissecondary IP address automatically become the main IP address automatically.

If there is an IP address when the address to be deleted is the current IP address,the first IP address automatically becomes the main IP address according to thetime sequence.

In addition, all the IP addresses configured at the interfaces in the router can not belocated in the same net.

If the no ip address command is not followed by ip-address, then all the IP addressesat this interface are all deleted.

Example

! Configure a main IP address 129.102.0.1 for Serial 0, and the secondary IP address is202.38.160.1.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip address 129.102.0.1 255.255.255.0

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip address 202.38.160.1 255.255.255.0 secondary

Related Command

ip route, show ip interface, show interface

1.1.2 ip address negotiate

To allow IP address negotiated at the interface, use the ip address negotiatecommand. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.

ip address negotiate

no ip address negotiate

Default

Disabled



1-3

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

PPP supports IP address negotiation. IP address negotiation at the interface can be setonly when PPP is encapsulated at the interface.

Normally, it is necessary to configure ip address negotiate command. Only in somespecial circumstances such as accessing Internet through the ISP, are the IPaddresses of the interface that is connected with the ISP allocated by the ISP throughnegotiation.

When IP address negotiate for the interface is configured, it is not necessary toconfigure the IP address for this interface.

Example

! Allow IP address to be negotiated at Serial 0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip address negotiate

1.1.3 hostname

To define host name for the router, use the hostname command.

hostname hostname

Syntax Description

hostname in a character, ranging 1 to 20 characters.

Default

The default hostname for the router is Quidway

Command Mode


Example

! Set the hostname as “huawei”

Quidway(config)# hostname huaweiHuawei(config)#

1.1.4 ip unnumbered

To enable IP processing on a serial interface without assigning an explicit IP address tothe interface, use the ip unnumbered command. To disable the IP processing on theinterface, use the no form of this command.

ip unnumbered interface-type interface-number



1-4

no ip unnumbered

Syntax Description

interface-type type of another interface on which the router has an assigned IPaddress.

interface-number number of another interface on which the router has an assigned IPaddress.

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Whenever the unnumbered interface generates a packet (for example, for a routingupdate), it uses the address of the specified interface as the source address of the IPpacket. It also uses the address of the specified interface in determining which routingprocesses are sending updates over the unnumbered interface. Restrictions includethe following:1) Serial interfaces using HDLC, PPP, Balanced (LAPB), and Frame Relay

encapsulations, as well as Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) and tunnelinterfaces can be unnumbered. It is not possible to use this interface configurationcommand with X.25 or Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) interfaces.

2) You cannot use the ping command to determine whether the interface is up,because the interface has no address. Simple Network Management Protocol(SNMP) can be used to remotely monitor interface status.

3) You cannot netboot a runnable image over an unnumbered serial interface.4) You cannot support IP security options on an unnumbered interface.The interface you specify by the type and number arguments must be enabled (listedas "up" in the show interfaces command display).

The interface-type interface-number cannot be another unnumbered interface.

Example

! Allow IP unnumbered from Ethernet 0 encapsulated with PPP.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip unnumbered ethernet 0

Related Command

ip proxy-arp

1.1.5 show hostname

To display the host name, use the show hostname command.

show hostname



1-5

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command shows the router’s hostnames.

Example

3640# show hostname

3640

1.1.6 show ip interface

To display the operating status of all the interfaces in effect, use the command show ipinterface [ type number ].

show ip interface [ type number ]

Syntax Description

type type of the interface

number number of the interface

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Using this command, the operating status of all the interfaces in effect will be displayed.

1.2 ARP Configuration Commands

Static ARP configuration commands include: arp clear arp-cache show arp debug arp packet

1.2.1 arp

To add a permanent entry in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache, use the arpcommand. To remove an entry from the ARP cache, use the no form of this command.

arp ip-address ethernet-address [ temp ]

no arp ip-address



1-6

Syntax Description

ip-address IP address in four-part dotted-decimal format corresponding to the localdata link address.

ether-address local data link address (a 48-bit address). Its format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX, where XX is in hex.

temp indicates that the map item is temporary, with a valid interval of 20 minutes,otherwise the router is always valid during the working time.

Default

No entries are permanently installed in the ARP cache

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The software uses ARP cache entries to translate 32-bit IP addresses into 48-bithardware addresses.

Because most hosts support dynamic resolution, you generally do not need to specifystatic ARP cache entries. To remove all nonstatic entries from the ARP cache, use theclear arp-cache command.

The static ARP map item is always valid when the router normally works, and the validinterval for the ARP map item is 20 minutes.

Example

! Set the Ethernet MAC address 00-e0-fc-01-00-00 corresponding to the IP address129.102.0.1 in the LAN, and this cache is temporarily valid.

Quidway(config)# arp 129.102.0.1 00-eo-fc-01-00-00 temp

Related Command

clear arp-cache, show arp

1.2.2 clear arp-cache

To delete all dynamic entries from the ARP cache, to clear the fast-switching cache,and to clear the IP route cache, use the clear arp-cache command.

clear arp-cache

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In some circumstances, it is necessary to clear and update the ARP cache. You canclear them with the clear arp-cache command.



1-7

Example

! Clear the ARP cache.

Quidway# clear arp-cache

Related Command

arp, show arp

1.2.3 show arp

To display the entries in the ARP table, use the show arp command.

show arp [ ip-address ]

Command Mode


Example

Quidway# show arpProtocol Address Hardware Address Type InterfaceInet 129.102.3.55 00-c0-26-9d-17-dc Dynamic Ethernet0Inet 129.102.146.20 00-c0-df-23-20-d9 Dynamic Ethernet0Inet 129.102.149.23 00-a0-b9-00-4c-b5 Dynamic Ethernet0

The above information shows that there are three items in the ARP cache. The firstitem, for example, indicates that: the protocol stack is IP; the IP address is129.102.3.55; the MAC address is 00-c0-26-9d-17-dc; this item is automaticallyderived through ARP from Ethernet0.

Related Command

arp, clear arp-cache

1.2.4 debug arp

To enable the arp packets debugging.

debug arp

Command Mode


1.3 Proxy ARP Configuration Commands

Proxy ARP configuration commands include: ip proxy-arp



1-8

1.3.1 ip proxy-arp

To enable proxy ARP on an interface, use the ip proxy-arp command. To disable proxyarp on the interface, use the no form of this command.

ip proxy-arp

no ip proxy-arp

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is applied on Ethernet interface. As for the hosts in the same hop but ondifferent physical networks, the proxy ARP function hides the fact that the physicalnetwork are separated, and makes the user feel like he is on the same and onephysical network.

Example

! Enable proxy ARP at Ethernet 0

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ip proxy-arp

1.4 DNS Configuration Commands

DNS configuration commands include: host show host

1.4.1 host

To define a static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache, use the hostcommand. To remove the name-to-address mapping, use the no form of thiscommand.

host host-name ip-address

Syntax Description

host-name name of the host, a 20-byte character string.

ip-address associated IP address.

Default

Disabled



1-9

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

There are two types of domain name solutions: dynamic domain name resolution andstatic domain name resolution. The former means that the user manually configuresthe map to the IP address. The latter means that the domain is resolved through theDNS server. Now the Quidway series of routers supports static domain name resolutiononly, and can maintain 50 map items at the most.

Example

! Define mapping from Quidway1 to 129.102.0.1.

Quidway(config)# host Quidway1 129.102.0.1

Related Command

show host

1.4.2 show host

To display the default domain name, the style of name lookup service, a list of nameserver hosts, and the cached list of host names and addresses, use the show hostcommand.

show host

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

You can make sure if the output to the static domain name table is correct, according tothe information output through this command.

Related Command

host

1.5 NAT Configuration Commands

The configuration commands of Network Address Translation (NAT) include: nat clear nat inside interface nat inside pool nat pool nat server nat timeout show nat debug nat



1-10

1.5.1 nat clear

To clear dynamic Network Address Translation (NAT) translations from the translationtable, use the nat clear command.

nat clear

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Clear up the mapping tables of address translation in the memory and release all thememory allocated dynamically to the mapping tables.

1.5.2 nat inside interface

To enable Network Address Translation (NAT) translations on the interface, use the natinside interface command. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.

nat inside access-list-number interface

no nat inside access-list-number interface

Syntax Description

access-list-number standard IP access control list number. Packets with destinationaddresses that pass the access control list are translated by the interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Translate the source address of the data message that conforms to the address accesscontrol list, by configuring the correlation between the address control list and theinterface. To translate by selecting one address in the address pool or by using directlythe IP address of the interface. You can configure different address translationcorrelation on one interface.

Example

The host computers of the 10.110.10.0/24 network segment are allowed for addresstranslation, selecting the addresses from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 as thetranslated address. Suppose ISP is connected by Serial0 port.Quidway(config)# access-list 1 deny anyQuidway(config)# access-list 1 permit 10.110.10.0 0.0.0.255! Add correlation between the address list and the address pool.Quidway(config-if-seral0)# nat inside 1 interface



1-11

1.5.3 nat inside pool

To enable Network Address Translation (NAT) of the inside destination address, usethe nat inside pool command. To remove the dynamic association to a pool, use theno form of this command.

nat inside access-list-number pool pool-name

no nat inside access-list-number pool pool-name

Syntax Description

access-list-number standard IP access control list number. Packets with destinationaddresses that pass the access control list are translated using global addresses fromthe named pool.

pool-name name of the pool from which global IP addresses are allocated duringdynamic translation.

Default

No inside destination addresses are translated

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command has two forms: dynamic and static address translation. The form with anaccess control list establishes dynamic translation. Packets from addresses that matchthe standard access control list are translated by using global addresses allocated fromthe pool named with the nat pool command.

Example

The host computers of the 10.110.10.0/24 network segment are allowed for addresstranslation, selecting the addresses from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 as thetranslated address. Suppose Serial0 port is connected to ISP.Quidway(config)# access-list 1 deny anyQuidway(config)# access-list 1 permit 10.110.10.0 0.0.0.255! Configure the address poolQuidway(config)# nat pool 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.12 pool 1! Add correlation between the address list and the address pool.Quidway(config-if-serial0)# nat inside 1 pool 1

1.5.4 nat pool

To define a pool of IP addresses for Network Address Translation (NAT), use the natpool command. To remove one or more addresses from the pool, use the no form ofthis command.

nat pool start-addr end-addr pool-name

no nat pool pool-name



1-12

Syntax Description

start-addr starting IP address that defines the range of addresses in the address pool.

end-addr ending IP address that defines the range of addresses in the address pool.

pool-nam name of the pool.

Default

No pool of addresses is defined

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

All the addresses in the address pool should be consecutive. For the most, 64addresses can be defined in each address pool.

An address pool can’t be deleted, if it is correlated to one access control list andaddress translation has started.

Example

! Configure one address pool from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.15, with the namepool1.Quidway(config)# nat pool 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.15 pool 1

1.5.5 nat server

To define a inside server associated with a pool of address, use the nat servercommand. To remove association to a pool, use the no form of this command.

nat server global global-addr [ global-port ] inside inside-addr inside-port protocol

no nat server { global | inside } address port protocol

Syntax Description

global-addr an IP address provided by a pool of address which can access the outside.

global-port a port number which can access the outside.

inside-add IP address of the inside server.

inside-port port number provided for the inside server, the port numbers commonlyused are stood for with key words. For instance: The WWW service port number is 80,which can also be stood for by WWW; The FTP service port number is 21, which canalso be stood for by FTP. inside-port is indispensable, which can be 0 or any of theports.

protocol could be TCP, UDP, IP or ICMP.

Command Mode




1-13

Usage Guideline

By this command, some of the servers, which the internal network can provide for theusage of the outside, can be configured, such as WWW, FTP, Telnet, pop3 and DNS.By the relevant no command, the corresponding internal server configuration can bedeleted. The interface of the command should be interconnected with ISP and is theexit of the internal network.

Example

! The IP address of the internal WWW server of the specified LAN is 10.110.10.10. TheIP address of the internal FTP server is 10.110.10.11. It is hoped that the outside canaccess WEB through http:// 202.110.10.10:8080 and connect FTP wet site throughftp://202.110.10.10. Suppose Serial0 is connected to ISP.Quidway(config-if-serial0)# nat server global 202.110.10.10 8080 inside 10.110.10.10tcp wwwQuidway(config-if-Serial0)# nat server global 202.38.160.101 inside 10.110.10.1 ftptcp! Specify one internal host computer 10.110.10.12. Hope that the host computer of theexternal network can find out that it’s connected with ping 202.110.10.11 command.Quidway(config)# nat server global 202.110.10.11 inside 10.110.10.12 any

1.5.6 nat timeout

To change the amount of time after which Network Address Translation (NAT) time out,use the nat timeout command. To restore the default value, use the no form of thiscommand.

nat timeout { tcp | udp | icmp seconds }

nat timeout default

Syntax Description

seconds number of seconds after which the specified port translation times out.

Default

The timeout value for TCP is 240 seconds.

The timeout value for UDP is 40 seconds.

The timeout value for ICMP is 20 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command sets up the valid time of address translation connection, different timefor different type of protocol. The unit of the time is second.

Example

! Set up the valid connection time of TCP protocol to 240 seconds.

ftp://202.110.10.10/



1-14

Quidway# nat timeout tcp 240

1.5.7 show nat

To display active Network Address Translation (NAT) translations, use the show natcommand.

show nat

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command shows the user’s configuration of the address translation. The user canverify if the configuration of the address translation is correct according to the inputinformation of this command.

Example

Quidway# show natNat pool pool1 from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 pool2 from 202.110.100.10 to 202.110.100.12Nat inside (Interface:Serial0): access-list(1) ---- Nat pool (pool1 )Nat server:Interface global-address global-port host-address host-port protocolSerial0 202.110.10.100 8080 10.110.10.10 80 (www) 6 (tcp)Serial0 202.110.10.100 2121 10.110.10.10 21 (ftp) 6 (tcp)Serial0 202.110.10.100 23(telnet)10.110.10.12 23(telnet) 6(tcp)Nat timeout: tcp timeout value -------------- 100 udp timeout value -------------- 60 icmp timeout value --------------- 20The information above shows: Two address pools, pool1 and pool2, are configured,with the addresses ranges from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 and from202.110.100.10 to 202.110.100.12 respectively. Seria10 is configured with NAT,enabling the addresses in address list 1 to be translated to the addresses in addresspool pool1. Serial0 is configured with 3 internal servers. The internal address of theWW server of http://202.110.10.100:8080 is 10.110.10.10; the internal address of FTPserver of ftp://202.110.10.100:2121 is 10.110.10.10; the internal address oftelnet://202.110.10.100 is 10.110.10.12. It’s the valid time of various connections in thelast row.

1.5.8 debug nat

Enable the NAT information debugging.

debug nat { event | packet }

Syntax Description

event enables the NAT event information debugging.

packet enables the NAT data packet information debugging.

http://202.110.10.100:8080/

ftp://202.110.10.100:2121/

telnet://202.110.10.100/



1-15

Command Mode


1.6 DHCP Configuration Commands

The configuration commands of DHCP include: ip forward-protocol udp ip helper-address show ip helper-address show ip forward-protocol debug forward-protocol

1.6.1 ip forward-protocol udp

To specify which protocols and ports the router forwards when forwarding broadcastpackets, use the ip forward-protocol udp command. To remove a protocol or port,use the no form of this command.

ip forward-protocol udp port

no ip forward-protocol udp [ port ]

Syntax Description

port destination port that controls which UDP services are forwarded.

Default

If an IP helper address is defined, UDP forwarding is enabled on default ports.

If a helper address is specified and UDP forwarding is enabled, broadcast packetsdestined to the following port numbers are forwarded by default:

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) (port 69) Domain Naming System (port 53) Time service (port 37) Boot Protocol (BOOTP) client and server datagrams (ports 67 and 68)

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For DHCP, the helper address defines the DHCP server address. After configuring ahelper address, the broadcast packets received from the interface will be transmitted tothe server. The interface that can configure helper addresses should support broadcast.Each interface can configure at most 20 helper addresses.

1.6.2 ip helper-address

To specify helper address, which forwards User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts,use the ip helper-address command. To disable the forwarding of broadcast packetsto specific addresses, use the no form of this command.



1-16

ip helper-address ip-address

no ip helper-address [ ip-address ]

Syntax Description

ip-address the starting ip-address in the address pool.

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

For DHCP, the helper address defines the DHCP server address. After configuring ahelper address, the broadcast packets received from the interface will be transmitted tothe server. The interface that can configure helper addresses should support broadcast.Each interface can configure at most 20 helper addresses.

1.6.3 show ip forward-protocol

To display the status of forwarding User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagrams, use theshow ip forward-protocol command.

show ip forward-protocol

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The command will display the status of forwarding UDP datagrams.

1.6.4 show ip helper-address

To display the status of helper address on the interface, use the show ip helper-address command.

show ip helper-address

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The command will display the status of helper address on the interface.



1-17

1.6.5 debug forward-protocol

To enable the forwarding packets debugging, use the debug forward-protocolcommand.

debug forward-protocol

Command Mode


1.7 VLAN configuration commands

VLAN configuration commands include: encapsulation dot1q interface ethernet show vlan

1.7.1 encapsulation dot1q

To specifies the Ethernet sub-interface of VLAN, use the encapsulation dot1qcommand. To cancel existing designations, use the no form of this command.

encapsulation dot1q vlan-id

no encap-vlan


vlan-id Identify the ID number of the VLAN to which Ethernet sub-interfacebelongs.The value range is 1~4094

Command Mode

Ethernet sub-interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

This command is used on the Ethernet sub-interface. Only after being configured withthis command, can the Ethernet sub-interface insert VLAN tag into the Ethernet frameheader according to the configured VLAN ID number, and the exchange interfacelinked with this network interface can properly handle the frame received.

Note:The Ethernet sub-interface is only applied in IPX and VLAN. So, as to a certainEthernet sub-interface which has not been configured with VLAN ID, it is not permittedto specify its IP address.



1-18

Example

! The following example specifies that the Ethernet interface Ethernet 0.1 belongs toVLAN 1.Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0.1)# encapsulation dot1q 1

Related Command

interface ethernet

1.7.2 interface ethernet

To create an Ethernet sub-interface or enter the already existing Ethernet sub-interfaceconfiguration mode, use the interface ethernet command. To delete the specifiedEthernet sub-interface, use the no form of this command.

interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number

no interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number


interface-number Ethernet interface serial number.

subinterface-number Ethernet interface serial number. The value range is0~4294967295. But when the value is 0, it refers to the main interface to which thesub-interface belongs, so actually the Ethernet sub-interface serial number starts from1.

Default

By default, the Ethernet sub-interface is not created.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The VLAN ID information can only be configured after the Ethernet sub-interface hasbeen created.

Example

! The following example establishes the Ethernet sub-interface and enters itsconfiguration mode.

Quidway(config)# interface ethernet 0.1

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0.1)#

1.7.3 show vlan

To display the related information such as the IDs of all the configured VLAN and theEthernet sub-interface where they are located etc., use the show vlan command.



1-19

show vlan

Command Mode

Privileged mode

Usage Guideline

This command can be used to get the information of all the VLAN configured on therouter and the related Ethernet sub-interface.

Example

! The following example shows the related information of all the configured VLAN.Quidway# show vlanEthernet0.1 ------------------- VLAN 2Ethernet0.2 ------------------- VLAN 1Table NC-1-1 describes the show vlan command parameters.

Table NC-1-1 show vlan command parameter description

Domain Name Descriptioninterface The Ethernet sub-interface where the VLAN is locatedVLAN VLAN ID

Related Command

encapsulation dot1q


Chapter 2IP Performance Configuration Commands

2-1

Chapter 2 IP Performance ConfigurationCommands

IP performance configuration commands include: clear ip counters ifquelen arp ifquelen interface ifquelen ip ifquelen ipx ip route-cache ip tcp header-compression mtu tcp finwait-time tcp synwait-time tcp window-size show ip cache show ip interface show ip traffic show tcp brief

2.1 clear ip counters

To clear the information of IP statistics counters, use the clear ip counters command.

clear ip counters

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In some special circumstances, it is necessary to clear the existing IP statistics for newstatistics.

Related Command

show ip interface, show ip traffic

2.2 ifquelen arp

To define the length of arp packets queue at the interface, use the ifquelen arpcommand. To restore the default value, use the no form of the command.

ifquelen arp queue-length

no ifquelen arp



2-2

Syntax Description

queue-length Ranging 0 to 1000 bytes.

Default

75 bytes

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Configuring the ARP queue length may affect the running efficiency at the Ethernetinterface. So you should configure it under the guidance of the technical supportengineer.

Example

! Configure the ARP queue length to be 70.

Quidway(config)# ifquelen arp 70

Related Command

show ip interface

2.3 ifquelen interface

To define the length of ARP packets queue, use the command ifquelen interface typenumber { receive-queue | send-queue } queue-length. To restore its default value,use the no form of the command.

ifquelen interface type number { receive-queue | send-queue } queue-length

no ifquelen interface

Syntax Description

queue-length ranging 10 to 1000 bytes.

Default

75 bytes

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Configuring the IP queue length may affect the running efficiency at the Ethernetinterface. So you should configure it under the guidance of the technical supportengineer.



2-3

2.4 ifquelen ip

To define the length of IP packets queue, use the ifquelen ip queue-length command.To restore its default value, use the no form of the command.

ifquelen ip queue-length

no ifquelen ip

Syntax Description


Default

75 bytes

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Configuring the IP queue length may affect the running efficiency at the Ethernetinterface. So you should configure it under the guidance of the technical supportengineer.

Example

! Configure the IP queue length to be 70

Quidway(config)# ifquelen ip 70

Related Command

show ip interface

2.5 ifquelen ipx

To define the length of IP packets queue at the interface, use the ifquelen ipxcommand. To restore its default value, use the no form of the command.

ifquelen ipx queue-length

no ifquelen ipx

Syntax Description


Default

75 bytes



2-4

Command Mode


Example

! Configure the IPX queue to 95.

Quidway(config)# ifquelen ipx 95

2.6 ip route-cache

To control the use of high-speed switching caches for IP routing, use the ip route-cache command. To disable any of these switching modes, use the no form of thiscommand.

ip route-cache

no ip route-cache

Default

Enabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

These two commands are respectively used to enable and disable fast forwarding ofpackets received at the interface. Fast forwarding is suitable for high-speed linkinterfaces (like the Ethernet and frame relay). Due to the low speed of the low-speedlink, it is meaningless to use fast forwarding. The Quidway® series of routers supportsfast forwarding at various high-speed links, including the Ethernet, synchronous PPP,frame relay, and HLDC. Also it supports fast downloading of the firewall. By default, theinterface can enable fast forwarding.

Example

! Disable ip route-cache.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# no ip route-cache

2.7 ip tcp header-compression

To enable TCP header compression, use the ip tcp header-compression command.To disable compression, use the no form of this command.

ip tcp header-compression

no ip tcp header-compression



2-5

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When running PPP in the lines of low speed WAN, the TCP header accounts for a largeproportion in all the transmitting data, so TCP header-compression can be used toimprove the efficiency of data transmission.

You can compress the headers of your TCP/IP packets in order to reduce the size ofyour packets. TCP header compression is supported on serial lines using Frame Relay,HDLC or Point-to-Point (PPP) encapsulation. You must enable compression on bothends of a serial connection. RFC 1144 specifies the compression process.Compressing the TCP header can speed up Telnet connections dramatically. Ingeneral, TCP header compression is advantageous when your traffic consists of manysmall packets, not for traffic that consists of large packets. Transaction processing(usually using terminals) tends to use small packets while file transfers use largepackets. This feature only compresses the TCP header, so it has no effect on UDPpackets or other protocol headers.

When compression is enabled, fast switching is disabled. This means that fastinterfaces like T1 can overload the router. Consider your network's trafficcharacteristics before using this command.

Example

! Enable TCP header-compression at the PPP interface Serial0.

Quidway(config-if-Serial0)# ip tcp header-compression

Related Command

encapsulation ppp

2.8 mtu

To set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of IP packets sent on an interface,use the mtu command. To restore the default MTU size, use the no form of thiscommand.

mtu size

no mtu

Syntax Description

Size the maximum size of the transmission unit. When the encapsulation format for theEthernet is EthernetII, the mtu at the interface ranges from 46 to 1500 bytes. When theencapsulation format at the Ethernet interface is SNAP, the mtu at the interface rangesfrom 46 to 1492 bytes; and that at the serial interface ranging 128 to 1500 bytes; themtu at the BRI interface ranging 128 to 1500 bytes.



2-6

Default

1500 bytes when the encapsulation format is EthernetII.

1492 bytes when the encapsulation format is SNAP.

1500 bytes for the serial interface; 1500 bytes for the BRI interface.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

If an IP packet exceeds the MTU set for the interface, the software will fragment it. Alldevices on a physical medium must have the same protocol MTU in order to operate.

2.9 tcp finwait-time

To set the TCP finwait timer, use the tcp finwait-time command. To restore the defaultvalue, use the no form of this command.

tcp finwait-time seconds

no tcp finwait-time

Syntax Description

seconds Value of the TCP finwait timer with the second as the unit, ranging 76 to 3600seconds.

Default

The default time is 675 seconds

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Start the finwait timer when the connection status changes from FIN_WATI_1 toFIN_WAIT_2. If no FIN message is received before the finwait timer is timeout, the TCPconnection will be terminated.

This parameter should be configured under the guidance of the technical supportengineer.

Example

! Set the value of the TCP finwait timer to be 675 seconds.

Quidway(config)# tcp finwait-time 675



2-7

Related Command

tcp synwait-time, tcp window-size

2.10 tcp synwait-time

To set a period of time the software waits while attempting to establish a TCPconnection before it times out, use the tcp synwait-time command. To restore thedefault time, use the no form of this command.

tcp synwait-time seconds

no tcp synwait-time

Syntax Description

seconds synwait-time a time value for the TCP synwait timer with the second as itsunit, ranging 2 to 600 seconds.

Default

The default time is 75 seconds

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the synchronous packet is transmitted, the TCP starts the synwait timer. If noacknowledgment packet is received before the synwait is timeout, then the TCPconnection will be terminated.

This parameter should be configured under the guidance of the technical supportengineer.

Example

! Configure the TCP synwait timer to 75 seconds.

Quidway(config)# tcp synwait-time 75

Related Command

tcp finwait-time, tcp window-size

2.11 tcp window-size

To define the tranceiving buffer window size of the connection-oriented socket, use thetcp window-size command. To restore the default value, use the no form of thiscommand.

tcp window-size window-size

no tcp window-size



2-8

Syntax Description

window-size window size of the TCP connection-oriented socket in Kbytes, ranging 1to 32 Kbytes.

Default

The default size is 4 Kbytes

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This parameter should better be set under the guidance of the technical supportengineer.

Example

! Set the window size of the TCP connection-oriented socket to be 4 Kbytes.

Quidway(config)# tcp window-size 4

Related Command

tcp finwait-time, tcp synwait-time

2.12 show ip cache

To display the routing table cache used to fast switch IP traffic, use the show iproute-cache command.

show ip route-cache

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is for showing the used routes and helping the user diagnose for faults.

Example

Quidway# show ip route-cacheRoute to destination 129.102.100.141: Destination NetMask Type Interface GateWay129.102.100.141 255.255.255.255 direct Ethernet0

The above information shows that the route recently used is one reaching129.102.100.141. This is a direct route, whose output interface is Ethernet0.

Related Command

ip route



2-9

2.13 show ip interface

To display the usability status of interfaces configured for IP, use the show ip interfacecommand.

show ip interface [ type number ]

Syntax Description

type the interface type.

number the interface number.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command outputs IP relevant information at the interface, and this is helpful forfault diagnosis

Example

Quidway# show ip interface serial 0 Interface is Serial0, Index is 2 ifFlags=8004 <NBMA,MULTICAST> protocol is x25 dte ietf, MTU is 1500, speed is 64000 bps input queue is 0/75/0 (current/max/drops) output queue is 0/75/0 (current/max/drops) 0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 multicasts 0 input packets dropped, 0 no protocols, 0 input errors 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 multicasts, 0 output errors

The above information shows; Serial0 has an index of 2; the interface type is NBMA,supporting multicast; the protocol encapsulated at this interface is X.25; the mtu is 1500bytes with a transmission speed of 64kbps. This also reflects the maximum lengths ofreceived and transmitted queues, number of packets in the current queue and numberof packets dropped due to a full queue, number of packets received and transmitted,number of multicast packets received and transmitted, number of unidentifiablepackets, etc.

Related Command

show interface

2.14 show ip traffic

To display statistics about IP traffic, use the show ip traffic command.

show ip traffic

Command Mode




2-10

Usage Guideline

This command shows the statistics of received and transmitted IP packets, assembledand fragmented packets, which are helpful for fault diagnosis.

Example

Quidway# show ip traffic IP statistics: Rcvd: 259 total, 250 local destination 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors 0 unknown protocol, 0 bad options Frags: 0 fragment rcvd, 0 fragment dropped 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts 0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment, 0 fragment sent Sent: 27 generated, 9 forwarded, 0 raw ip packets 0 dropped, 0 no route, 0 Compress fails ICMP statistics: Rcvd: 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 14 echo, 0 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench 0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 14 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench 0 parameter problem, 0 timestamp, 0 info reply

The above information shows: IP statistics;

Received: 259 messages received, 250 of which are transmitted to the upper-layerprotocol; no packet format error; no packet check error; no unknown protocol; nopacket option error.

Fragments: no fragments received or dropped; the number of fragments successfullyreassembled is 0, and no fragment re-assembly timeout; the number of packetssuccessfully fragmented is 0, and number of packets that can not be fragmented is 0;the number of fragments generated and forwarded is 0.

Sent: 27 packets generated, and 9 packets forwarded; 0 Raw IP packet generated; 0packet dropped; 0 packet with no route; 0 packet fails to be compressed.

ICMP statistics:Received: 0 packet with format error received, 0 packet with checksum error, 0 redirectpacket, 0 unreachable packet, 14 echo request packets, 0 mask request packet, 0mask reply packet, 0 quench packet, 0 packet with parameter problem, 0 timestamprequest packet, and 0 information request packets.

Sent: 0 redirect packet forwarded, 0 unreachable packet, 0 echo request packet, 14packets, 0 mask request packet, 0 mask reply packet, 0 quench packet, 0 packet withparameter problem, 0 timestamp request packet, and 0 information reply packet.

Related Command

show interface, show ip interface, clear ip counters

2.15 show tcp brief

To display TCP connection status, use the show tcp brief command.

show tcp brief



2-11

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command shows all the TCP connection states so that the user can monitor theTCP connections at any time.

Example

Quidway# show tcp briefLocalAddress LocalPort ForeignAddress ForeignPort State129.102.100.142 23 129.102.001.092 1038 ESTABLISHED000.000.000.000 23 000.000.000.000 0 LISTEN

The above information shows: a TCP connection has been set up, and the local UPaddress of the TCP is 129.102.100.142; the local port number is 23; the foreign IPaddress is 129.102.1.92; the remote port number is 1038. In addition, there is a serverespecially responsible for monitoring port 23.

Related Command

show client


Chapter 3IPX Configuration Commands

3-1

Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands

IPX configuration commands include: clear ipx counters ipx default-route ipx delay ipx down ipx encapsulation ipx gns-reply-disable ipx gns-round-robin ipx max-paths ipx max-reserve-paths ipx max-reserve-servers ipx network ipx rip-max-packetsize ipx rip-multiplier ipx rip-update-time ipx route ipx routing ipx sap ipx sap-max-packetsize ipx sap-multiplier ipx sap-update-time ipx split-horizon ipx type-20-propagation ipx touch-off show ipx interface show ipx route show ipx servers show ipx traffic

3.1 clear ipx counters

To reset all ipx counters, use the clear ipx counters command.

clear ipx counters

Command Mode


Example

! Clear all the IPX counters.

Quidway# clear ipx counters

Related Command

show ipx traffic



3-2

3.2 ipx default-route

To forward to the default network all packets for which a route to the destinationnetwork is unknown, use the ipx default-route command. To disable the use of thedefault network, use the no form of this command.

ipx default-route

no ipx default-route

Default

Enabled: All packets for which a route to the destination is unknown are forwarded tothe default network, which is –2 (0xFFFFFFFE).

Command Mode


Example

! Disable the default route.

Quidway(config)# no ipx default-route

3.3 ipx delay

To set the tick count, use the ipx delay command. To reset the default increment in thedelay field, use the no form of this command.

ipx delay ticks

no ipx delay

Syntax Description

ticks number of IBM clock ticks of delay to use. One clock tick is 1/18 of a second(approximately 55 ms).

Default

1 tick for the ipx delay for the Ethernet, 30 ticks for the serial interface, and 6 ticks forthe other WAN interfaces.

Command Mode

Interface mode

Usage Guideline

The ipx delay command is used as a basis for judging the best route. In privileged usermode, the show ipx interface command can be used to show the values configuredthrough ipx delay command.



3-3

Example

! Set the delay at Ethernet0 to be 10 ticks.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx delay 10

Related Command

ipx max-paths

3.4 ipx encapsulation

To define the encapsulation frame type at the Ethernet, use the ipx encapsulationcommand. To restore the default encapsulation frame type, use the no form of thiscommand.

no ipx encapsulation frame_type

no ipx encapsulation

Syntax Description

frame_type encapsulation frame type at the Ethernet, which can be any of theEthernet-II(ARPA), Ethernet-SNAP(SNAP), IEEE8.2.2(sap) and IEEE802.3(novell-ether).

Default

Novell-ether

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The value set through this command is used to process the received packet at theEthernet interface. If the packet type is different from the set encapsulation frame type,then the packet will be lost. The packet sent from the Ethernet interface is forwarded tothe physical layer after it has been encapsulated in the specified frame type. The showipx route command can be executed to show the encapsulation frame type that hasbeen configured through ipx encapsulation.

Example

! Set the encapsulation frame type at Ethernet0 to be SAP

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx encapsulation sap

3.5 ipx gns-reply-disable

To disable the sending of replies to IPX Get Nearest Server (GNS) queries, use the ipxgns-reply-disable command. To disable the function (Replies are sent to IPX GNSqueries), use the no form of this command.



3-4

ipx gns-reply-disable

no ipx gns-reply-disable

Default

Replies are sent to IPX GNS queries

Command Mode


Example

! Disable reply to IPX GNS request at Ethernet0.

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx gns-reply-disable

3.6 ipx gns-round-robin

To rotate using a round-robin selection method through a set of eligible servers whenresponding to Get Nearest Server (GNS) requests, use the ipx gns-round-robincommand. To use the most recently learned server, use the no form of this command.

ipx gns-round-robin

no ipx gns-round-robin

Default

The most recently learned eligible server is used

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

In the normal server selection process, requests for service are responded to with themost recently learned, closest server. If you enable the round-robin method, thesoftware maintains a list of the nearest servers eligible to provide specific services. Ituses this list when responding to GNS requests. Responses to requests are distributedin a round-robin fashion across all active IPX interfaces on the router.

Example

! Enable ipx gns-round-robin.

Quidway(config)# ipx gns-round-robin

3.7 ipx max-paths

To set the maximum number of equal-cost paths the software uses when forwardingpackets, use the ipx maximum-paths command. To restore the default value, use theno form of this command.



3-5

ipx max-paths paths

no ipx max-paths

Syntax Description

paths maximum number of equal-cost paths which the software will use, ranging 1 to64.

Default

The maximum number of equal-cost paths is 1 path

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The ipx maximum-paths command increases throughput by allowing the software tochoose among several equal-cost, parallel paths. (Note that when paths have differentcosts, the software chooses lower-cost routes in preference to higher-cost routes.)

When per-host load sharing is disabled, IPX performs load sharing on a packet-by-packet basis in round-robin fashion, regardless of whether you are using fast switchingor process switching. That is, the first packet is sent along the first path, the secondpacket along the second path, and so on. When the final path is reached, the nextpacket is sent to the first path, the next to the second path, and so on.

Limiting the number of equal-cost paths can save memory on routers with limitedmemory or with very large configurations. Additionally, in networks with a large numberof multiple paths and systems with limited ability to cache out-of-sequence packets,performance might suffer when traffic is split between many paths.

Example

! Set the maximum IPX paths to be 5 paths.

Quidway(config)# ipx max-paths 5

Related Command

ipx max-reserve-paths

3.8 ipx max-reserve-paths

To set the length of routing reserve queue, use the no ipx max-reserve-pathscommand. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command.

ipx max-reserve-paths paths

no ipx max-reserve-paths

Syntax Description

paths the length of routing reserve queue, ranging 1 to 255.



3-6

Default

Default length of the routing reserve queue is 4.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the length of the max reserve queue is 1, the system reserves one route only fora destination. When this unique route is faulty and the system has deleted it, there noroute available to this destination while it is searching for routes, and this will lead toserious loss of packets. When the length of the reserve queue is greater than 1 and thefirst route is deleted, the system can replace it with the next route so as to avoid seriousloss of packets. Increasing the length of the reserve queue will result in more memoryof the system being used by the IPX module.

Example

! Set the length of the max routing reserve queue to be 10.

Quidway(config)# ipx max-reserve-paths 10

Related Command

ipx max-paths

3.9 ipx max-reserve-servers

To set the length of server information reserve queue, use the no ipx max-reserve-servers command. To restore the default value, use the no form of this command.

ipx max-reserve-servers length

no ipx max-reserve-servers

Syntax Description

length length of the server information reserve queue, ranging 1 to 64.

Default

Default length of the server information reserve queue is 4

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the length of the max reserve queue is 1, the system reserves one route only fora destination. When this unique route is faulty and the system has deleted it, there noroute available to this destination while it is searching for routes, and this will lead toserious loss of packets. When the length of the reserve queue is greater than 1 and the



3-7

first route is deleted, the system can replace it with the next route so as to avoid seriousloss of packets. Increasing the length of the reserve queue will result in more memoryof the system being used by the IPX module.

Example

! Set the length of the max server information reserve queue to be 10.

Quidway(config)# ipx max-reserve-servers 10

3.10 ipx network

To enable IPX routing on a particular interface, use the ipx network command. Todisable IPX routing, use the no form of this command.

ipx network network

no ipx network

Syntax Description

network IPX network number. This is an eight-digit hexadecimal number that uniquelyidentifies a network cable segment ranging 1 to FFFFFFFD. You do not need to specifyleading zeros in the network number. For example, for the network number 000000AAyou can enter AA.

Default

IPX routing is disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

To activate the IPX module on an interface, it is necessary to use the ipx networkcommand. If it is necessary to change the encapsulation type of the IPX frame, you canuse the ipx encapsulation command.

Example

! Activate the IPX route at Ethernet0.

Quidway(config)# ipx routing

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# interface ethernet 0

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx network 2

! Activate the IPX route at Ethernet0, and set the encapsulation form of IPX frame toEthernet_SNAP.


Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# interface ethernet 0

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx network 2



3-8

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx encapsulation snap

Related Command

ipx encapsulation, ipx routing

3.11 ipx rip-max-packetsize

To configure the maximum packet size of RIP updates sent out the interface, use theipx rip-max-packetsize command mode. To restore the default packet size, use theno form of this command.

ipx rip-max-packetsize bytes

no ipx rip-max-packetsize

Syntax Description

bytes maximum packet size in bytes, ranging 432 to 1500 bytes.

Default

The default packet size is 432 bytes, which allows for 50 routes at 8 bytes each.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The maximum size includes the sizes of IPX packet header and RIP packet header.

Example

! Set the maximum RIP packet size at Ethernet0 to be 832 bytes (that is, it can contain100 routing messages).

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx rip-max-packetsize 832

3.12 ipx rip-multiplier

To configure the cycle in which a network's RIP entry ages out, use the ipx rip-multiplier command. To restore the default cycle, use the no form of this command.

ipx rip-multiplier multiplier

no ipx rip-multiplier

Syntax Description

multiplier multiplier used to calculate the cycle at which to age out RIP routing tableentries. The value you specify is multiplied by the RIP update cycle to determine theaging-out cycle. By default, it is three times the RIP update cycle, ranging 1 to 1000.



3-9

Default

Three times the RIP update cycle

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

All routers in the same IPX network should use the same RIP aging cycle.

Related Command

ipx rip-update-time

3.13 ipx rip-update-time

To set intervals for IPX RIP to control how long it will be waiting to receive the next RIPupdate packets, use the ipx rip-update-time command. To restore the default value,use the no form of this command.

ipx rip-update-time seconds

no ipx rip-update-time

Syntax Description

seconds RIP update time in seconds, ranging 10 to 60000 seconds.

Default

60 seconds

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When the router is started or shut down, it is necessary to exchange routing informationwith other routers through propagation. When it is running, it needs to propagatecyclically to exchange routing information with the other routers. The ipx rip-update-time command is used to set the time interval between two rounds of routinginformation propagation. This interval is 60 seconds by default. In the same networksegment, this interval should be the same.

Example

! Set the IPX RIP update packet interval to be 40 seconds.

Quidway(config)# ipx rip-update-time 40



3-10

Related Command

show ipx interface

3.14 ipx route1) To add a static route summary to the routing table, use the ipx route static

command. To remove a static route from the routing table, use the no form of thiscommand.

ipx route network network.node ticks hops static [ preference value ]

no ipx route network [ network.node ] static [ preference value ]2) To add a default route to the routing table, use the ipx route default command. To

remove a default route from the routing table, use the no form of this command.ipx route default network.node [ preference value ]

no ipx route default network.node [ preference value ]

Syntax Description

network IPX network number, which is composed of 8 hex digits. It is a unique id in thehop, ranging 1~FFFFFFFD. While inputting the number, you can omit the leading zeros.As for 000000AA, for example, you only need to input AA.

network.node IPX address of the next router to reach a specified hop. Network is anumber composed of 8 hex digits. It is unique id for the hop, ranging 1~FFFFFFFD.When it is input, its leading zeros can be omitted. As for 000000AA, for example, youonly need to input AA. node is used to identify a node in the network, with a length of 48bits. When it is input, it is composed of three groups of 4-digit numbers in hex separatedby dots (xxxx.xxxx.xxxx).

ticks time needed for reaching the destination hop, its unit being the tick (1 tick=1/18').

hops number of routers to go through before reaching the destination hop.

default creates a static entry for the "default route”. All the packets that cannot finddestinations are sent here.

static remove information of the "static route”.

preference routing preference;

value preference value, ranging 0 to 255.

Default

No static routes are predefined

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The routing protocol can dynamically update the routing table, but it also can add staticroutes to the routing table, and expressly give an instruction of how to reach a



3-11

destination. The preference for the static route is 10, and that for a dynamic route is 60.The smaller the value, the higher the preference.

Note that when a static route is set up and once an error occurs to any segment of thisroute, communication will be interrupted or packets are transmitted to a non-existingdestination.

A default route can be configured in a router. When its destination network is configuredas FFFFFFFE, all the packets that fail to find routes will be forwarded along this route.

Example

! Reach the hop 5a through the router with the address 1000.0.0c91.f61f


Quidway(config)# ipx route 5a 1000.0.0c91.f61f 10 2

! Set a default routing which next hop address is 3.4a.60.7.


Quidway(config)# ipx route default 3.4a.60.7 10 2

! Set a default routing which next hop address is 3.4a.60.7, with a preference of 20.


Quidway(config)# ipx route default 3.4a.60.7 10 2 preference 20

Related Command

ipx default-route, show ipx route

3.15 ipx routing

To enable IPX, use the ipx routing command. To disable IPX, use the no form of thiscommand.

ipx routing [ node ]

no ipx routing

Syntax Description

node node’s number of the router. This is a 48-bit value represented by a dotted tripletof four-digit hexadecimal numbers. It is not a broadcasting address. If you omit thenode argument, the software will use the hardware MAC address currently assigned toit as its node address.

Default

Disabled

Command Mode




3-12

Usage Guideline

The ipx routing command enables IPX Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and ServiceAdvertising Protocol (SAP) services.

If you omit the node value, when MAC addresses change, the node values of routerswill automatically change. In this way, during the period when MAC addresses changeand clients and servers get new addresses, the communication may break off.

Example

! Enable the IPX routing in the router.


! Enable the IPX routing in the router, the node’s number is 1.1.1.

Quidway(config)# ipx routing 1.1.1

Related Command

ipx network

3.16 ipx sap

To add a static Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) entry to the SAP table, use the ipxsap command. To remove static SAP entries, use the no form of this command.

ipx sap service-type name network.node socket hopcount preference preference

no ipx sap service-type [ name ] [ network.node ]

Syntax Description

service-type SAP service-type number. See the access-list (SAP filtering) commandearlier in this chapter for a table of some IPX SAP services.

Name name of the server that provides the service.

network.node network number and node address of the server. As a unique id for ahop, the network number is composed of 8 hex digits, ranging 1 to FFFFFFFD. Whileinputting it, the leading zeros can be omitted. As for 000000AA, for example, you onlyneed to input AA. The node value is used to identify a node in the network, with a lengthof 48 bits. When it is actually input, it is composed of 3 groups of 4-digit number in hexseparated by dot (xxxx.xxxx.xxxx).

socket socket number for this service.

hopcount count of hops to go through before reaching the server.

preference the preference of service information.

preference the value of the preference of service information, ranging 0 to 255.

Default

Disabled



3-13

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The ipx sap command allows you to add a static entry into the SAP table. Each entryhas a SAP service associated with it. By default the preference of the static SAP entryis 10 and the preference of the dynamic one is 60. The smaller the value, the higher thepreference. The router will not announce a static SAP entry unless it has a route to thatnetwork.

Example

! Add a piece of service information of type 4 at 1000.0.0c91.f61f.

Quidway(config)# ipx sap 4 server1 1000.0.0c91.f61f 451 2

! Add a piece of service information of type 4 at 1000.0.0c91.f61f and with a preferenceof 40

Quidway(config)# ipx sap 4 server1 1000.0.0c91.f61f 451 2 preference 40

Related Command

show ipx servers

3.17 ipx sap-max-packetsize

To configure the maximum packet size of Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) updatessent out the interface, use the ipx sap-max-packetsize command. To restore thedefault packet size, use the no form of this command.

ipx sap-max-packetsize bytes

no ipx sap-max-packetsize

Syntax Description

bytes Maximum packet size in bytes, ranging 480 to 1500 bytes.

Default

The default is 480 bytes, which allows for 7 servers (64 bytes each).

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The maximum size includes the sizes of the IPX packet header and SAP header.



3-14

Example

! Set the maximum SAP packet size to be 672 bytes (which can contain 10 pieces ofservice information) at Ethernet0

Quidway(config-if-Ethernet0)# ipx sap-max-packetsize 672

3.18 ipx sap-multiplier

To configure the interval at which a network or server's Service Advertising Protocol(SAP) entry ages out, use the ipx sap-multiplier command. To restore the defaultinterval, use the no form of this command.

ipx sap-multiplier multiplier

no ipx sap-multiplier

Syntax Description

multiplier multiplier used to calculate the cycle at which to age out SAP routing tableentries. The value you specify is multiplied by the SAP update cycle to determine theaging-out cycle. By default, it is three times the update cycle.

Default

The default is three times the SAP update cycle.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

All routers in the same network should use the same multiplier value.

Example

!If the SAP update interval is 2 minutes, then the SAP aging multiplier is 10 minutesafter the following command is executed.

Quidway(config)# ipx sap-multiplier 5

Related Command

ipx sap-update-time

3.19 ipx sap-update-time

To set intervals for IPX SAP to control how long it will be waiting to receive the next SAPupdate packets, use the ipx sap-update-time command. To restore the default value,use the no form of this command.

ipx sap-update-time seconds

no ipx sap-update-time



3-15

Syntax Description

seconds are used to calculate the SAP update time, ranging 60 to 60000 seconds.

Default

60 seconds

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When a router is started or shut down, it needs to exchange information with otherrouters through propagation. When it is running, it needs to propagate outwardcyclically, exchanging information with other servers. The ipx sap-update-timecommand is used to set the time interval between two rounds of service informationpropagation. This interval is 60 seconds by default. In the same network segment, thisinterval should be of the same value.

Example

! Set the SAP update cycle to be 120 seconds.Quidway(config)# ipx sap-update-time 120

Related Command

show ipx interface

3.20 ipx type-20-propagation

To forward IPX type 20 propagation packet broadcasts to other network segments, usethe ipx type-20-propagation command. To disable the forwarding of type 20broadcasts on an interface, use the no form of this command.

ipx type-20-propagation

no ipx type-20-propagation

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Routers normally block all broadcast requests. To allow input and output of type 20propagation packets on an interface, use the ipx type-20-propagation command.



3-16

3.21 ipx split-horizon

To enable split-horizon, use the ipx split-horizon command. To disable the function,use the no form of this command.

ipx split-horizon

no ipx split-horizon

Default

Enable split-horizon.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The split-horizon arithmetic can prevent route loop. Split-horizon means that aninterface will not send out routes that it receives. But in some unusual conditions,split-horizon should be disabled, that is, to achieve the correct transmission bysacrificing efficiency. It will be better not to use the configuration of disabling RIP split-horizon without thinking. Disabling split-horizon will have no effect on point-to-pointlinks.

3.22 ipx touch-off

To enable triggered RIP updates sent on an interface, use the ipx rouch-off command.To disable the function, use the no form of this command.

ipx touch-off

no ipx touch-off

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

IPX’s RIP and SAP will send update broadcast packets cyclically. If the user does notwant the router to keep on sending such packets, he can enable the ipx touch-offfunction at the interface. In this way, update packets will be sent only in the case ofchange in the routing or service information.

3.23 show ipx interface

To display the status of the IPX interfaces configured and the parameters configured oneach interface, use the show ipx interface command.



3-17

show ipx interface [ type number ]

Syntax Description

type interface type.

number interface number.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The information output through this command is helpful for the user to determine if theIPX configuration is correct and to perform IPX fault diagnosis.

Example

Quidway# show ipx interface serial 0Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is upIPX address is 2.00E0.FC01.0000 [up] line-upDelay of this IPX network in ticks is 1IPX type 20 propagation packet forwarding is enabledSAP GNS processing enabledSAP GNS round robin processing disabledThe maximum number of services reserved is 4IPX RIP update interval is 60 seconds aging multiples is 3IPX SAP update interval is 60 seconds aging multiples is 3RIP packet maximum size is 432 bytesSAP packet maximum size is 480 bytesRIP packets received 0 RIP packets sent 1SAP packets received 0 SAP packets sent 00 bytes received, 0 bytes sent



3-18

Table NC-3-1 show ipx interface command and meanings of its fields

Name of field MeaningEthernet0 is ... Seen from the physical layer, if the current interface is up, down, or

administratively down.protocol is ... If the bottom-layer is up or down.IPX protocol processing disabled If the IPX module is activated at the current interfaceIPX address is ... The IPX network number and node value for the current interface. For the

detail of the network number and node value, please consult the ipx networkand ipx routing commands.

[up]line up If the current interface is up, available or not yet activated.Delay of this IPX network, in ticksis ...

Delay of the current interface. Its value is configured through the ipx delaycommand.

IPX type 20 propagationpacket forwarding ...

Indicating if IPX type –20 propagation packet forwarding is enabled ordisabled. The relevant commands include ipx type-20-propagation.

SAP GNS processing ... SAP GNS request is being processed at the current interface. The relevantcommands include ipx gns-reply-disable.

SAP GNS round robinprocessing ...

If reply to the SAP GNS request is based on round robin or the nearestservice information. The relevant commands include ipx gns-round-robin.

The maximum number of servicesreserved is ...

Maximum number of services of the same type reserved. The relevantcommands include ipx max-reserve-servers.

IPX RIP update interval is ...seconds aging multiplies is ...

RIP update interval and aging multiplier. The commands relevant with itinclude ipx rip-update-time和ipx rip-multiplier.

IPX SAP update interval is...seconds, aging multiplies is ...

SAP update interval and aging multiplier. The commands relevant with itinclude ipx sap-update-time and ipx sap-multiplier.

RIP packet maximum size is ...bytes

RIP packet maximum size at the current interface. The command relevantwith it is ipx rip-max-packetsize.

SAP packet maximum size is ...bytes

SAP packet maximum size at the current interface. The command relevantwith it is ipx sap-max-packetsize.

RIP packets received ... RIP packets received at the current interfaceRIP packets sent ... RIP packets sent at the current interfaceSAP packets received ... SAP packets received at the current interfaceSAP packets sent ... SAP packets sent at the current interface... bytes received Total bytes received at the current interface... bytes sent Total bytes sent at the current interface

Related Command

ipx routing, ipx network, ipx down, ipx delay, ipx type-20-propagation, ipx gns-reply-disable, ipx gns-round-robin, ipx max-reserve-servers, ipx rip-update-time,ipx rip-multiplier, ipx sap-update-time, ipx sap-multiplier, ipx rip-max-packetsize,ipx sap-max-packetsize

3.24 show ipx route

To display the contents of the IPX routing table, use the show ipx route command.

show ipx route [network | static | default ] [ detailed ]

Syntax Description

network Number of the network whose routing table entry you want to display. it is aunique id for a hop, ranging 1 to FFFFFFFD. When inputting this number, the leadingnumber can be omitted. To enter 000000AA, for example, you only need to input AA.

static indicating all the static routes.



3-19

default displays the default route. This is equivalent to specifying a value ofFFFFFFFE for the argument network.

detailed displays detailed route information.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The information output through this command is helpful for IPX RIP fault diagnosis.

Example

Quidway# show ipx routeCodes: C - Direct connected network, S - Static, F - Float s - seconds,u - uses5 Total IPX routes.Up to 1 parallel paths, 4 reserved paths and 16 hops allowed.Current default route is:S FFFFFFFE [010/02/010] via 2.0A03.0C50.0003, Ethernet0C 2 (NOVELL-ETHER), Ethernet0C 1000 (PPP), Serial0S 100 [010/02/010] via 1000.0B00.CD00.0000, Serial0F 10 [060/02/010] via 2.0A03.0C50.0003, 10s, Ethernet0

Table NC-3-2 show ipx route command and meanings of its fields

Name of field MeaningCodes Specified sources of routesC Directly connected network numberS Static routes defined through ipx route commandF Floating (dynamic) routes known through the RIP update packet5 Total IPX routes. Total routes in the routing tableUp to 1 paths Maximum paths (routes), which are re-defined through the ipx max-paths

command.4 reserved paths Length of the max routing information queue; which can be redefined via

the ipx max-reserve-paths command.Current default route is: The current default routeNo default route known. No default route is known yetDefault route handling is disabled. Default route handling is not supported. It can be re-defined through ipx

default-route.Net 1 The destination network to which a route points[010/02/010] preference/hop/delay. The smaller the preference, the higher the

preference of the route. The unit for delay is the tick (1 tick=1/18 second),and a hop indicates the number of routers to go through before reachingthe destination.

via network.node IPX address of the next hop10s Aging time, with the second as its unit.u Times when this route is used. Each time this route is used, 1 is added to

the counter.

Related Command

ipx max-paths, ipx max-reserve-paths, ipx route



3-20

3.25 show ipx servers

To list the IPX servers discovered through Service Advertising Protocol (SAP)advertisements, use the show ipx servers command.

show ipx servers [ type service-type | name name | network network | socket socket| sorted { net | type } ] [ detailed ]

Syntax Description

type displays the IPX servers numerically by SAP service type.

service-type type of service.

name displays the IPX servers alphabetically by server name

name name of server.

network displays the IPX servers in the specified hop.

network the number of the hop where the server to be shown by the user is located.

socket service information whose socket is the same as the specified socket.

socket

sorted displays the IPX service information sorted by type.

net classified by the net number.

type classified by the service type.

detailed details of service information listed.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This information output through this command is helpful for IPX SAP fault diagnosis bythe user.

Example

Quidway# show ipx serversCodes: S - Static, F - Float, s - seconds 3 Total IPX Servers. 4 reserved servers allowedTable ordering is based on routing and server infoType Name Net Address Port Pre/Route Hops IfF 4 SERVER1 3092D3F3.0000.0000.0001:0451 010/2/01 1 Ethernet0P 26B BJTREE 3092D3F3.0000.0000.0001:0005 060/2/01 1 Ethernet0P 278 BJTREE 3092D3F3.0000.0000.0001:4006 060/2/01 1 Ethernet0



3-21

Table NC-3-3 show ipx servers command and meaning of the fields of the command

Name of field MeaningCodes Specified sources of service informationS Static service information defined through the ipx sap commandF Dynamic service information known from the SAP update packetType Sources and service types of service informationName Server nameNet Network number of the hop where the server is locatedAddress Node value for the serverPort SocketPre Preference: the smaller the value, the higher the preferencePre/Route Delay/hop (from the routing information table)Hops Hop (from SAP)If Interfaces to go through before reaching the hop where the router is locateds Aging multiplier for service information* Indicating that the static service information has turned invalidconn Indicating the delay/hop for static service informationFull name Indicating that what are to be shown are full service information namesvia Indicating that what are to be shown are interfaces for receiving such service information

Related Command

ipx max-reserve-servers, ipx sap

3.26 show ipx traffic

To display information about the number and type of IPX packets sent and received,use the show ipx traffic command.

show ipx traffic

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The information output through this command is helpful for the user to make IPX trafficstatistics and fault diagnosis.

Example

Quidway# show ipx trafficRecv: 0 total, 0 droped 0 checksum errors, 0 bad hop count 0 discarded(hop=16), 0 encapsulation failed 0 packets pitched, 0 local destination 0 broadcast, 0 forward, 0 echoSent: 0 total, 0 broadcast 0 forwarded, 0 echoType 20: 0 received, 0 matched, 0 discarded (tc>=8) 0 sent, 0 successfully sent, 0 encapsulation failedRIP: 0 RIP requests, 0 RIP replies, 1 RIP requests sent 0 RIP advertisements received, 0 sent 1 routes



3-22

SAP: 0 SAP get nearest requests, 0 SAP get nearest replies 0 SAP requests, 0 SAP replies, 1 SAP requests sent 0 SAP advertisements received, 0 sent 1 serversForward: 0 need forwarding, 0 success 0 no route, 0 encapsulation failedEcho: 0 requests received, 0 replies sent 0 requests sent, 0 replies received 0 no routeTotal: 412 bytes received, 576 bytes sent

Table NC-3-4 Meanings of the fields in show ipx traffic

Name of field MeaningRecv: Count of received packets0 total Total packets received0 drop Total packets dropped when the router is too busy0 checksum errors Total packets dropped due to checksum errors0 bad hop count Total packets whose hop values are over 160 discarded(hop=16) Total packets whose hop values=160 encapsulation failed Total packets where encapsulation failed0 packets patched Number of packets patched0 local destination Number of packets whose destination is local0 broadcast Number of received broadcast packets0 forward Number of packets to be forwarded0 echo Number of received echo packetsSent: Total packets sent from the router, including those packets that are to be

forwarded for have been generated by itself.0 total Total packets sent0 broadcast Total broadcast packets0 forward Total forwarded packets0 echo Number of echo packet sentType 20: Count of IPX packets of type 200 received Total received IPX packets of type 200 matched Number of matched IPX packets of type 200 discarded (tc>=8) Number of IPX packets of type 20 whose hop values are over 70 sent Number of sent IPX packets of type 200 successfully sent Number of IPX packets of type 20 successfully sent0 encapsulation failed Number of IPX packets of type 20 that have failed to be sentRIP: Count of RIP packets0 RIP requests Count of received RIP request packets0 RIP replies Count of reply RIP packets1 RIP requests sent Number of sent RIP request packets generated by the router0 RIP advertisements received Number of received RIP reply packets0 sent Number of RIP reply packets generated by the router1 routes Number of routing information items in the routing tableSAP: Count of SAP packets0 SAP get nearest requests Number of received SAP GNS request packets0 SAP get nearest replies Count of replies to the SAP GNS request packet0 SAP requests Number of received SAP request packets报文的数目

0 SAP replies Count of replies to the SAP request packet1 SAP requests sent Count of SAP request packets generated by the router0 SAP advertisements received Number of received SAP reply packets0 sent Number of SAP reply messages generated by the router1 servers Number of service information table items in the service information tableForward: Count of forwarded packets0 need forwarding Number of packets to be forwarded0 success Number of packets successfully forwarded0 no route Number of packet that has not yet found the destination hop0 encapsulation failed Number of packets that fail to be forwarded due to other causesEcho: Count of IPX ping packets



3-23

Name of field Meaning0 requests received Number of received IPX ping requests0 replies sent Count of replies to IPX ping requests0 requests sent Number of sent IPX ping requests0 replies received Number of received IPX ping replies0 no route Number of IPX ping packets that fail to find routesTotal: Total traffic statistics at the interface412 bytes received Total received IPX packets at the interface576 bytes sent Total sent IPX packets at the interface


Chapter 4DLSw Configuration Commands

4-1

Chapter 4 DLSw Configuration Commands

DLSw configuration commands include: clear dlsw bridge-entry clear dlsw circuits dlsw bridge-group (Global configuration) dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration) dlsw bridge-group (synchronous interface configuration) dlsw disable dlsw local-peer tcp dlsw remote-peer tcp dlsw timer encapsulation sdlc idle-mark llc2 ack-delay-time llc2 ack-max llc2 local-window llc2 modulus llc2 N2 llc2 t1-time llc2 tbusy-time llc2 tpf-time llc2 trej-time llc2 txq-max sdlc address sdlc holdq sdlc k sdlc modulus sdlc N1 sdlc N2 sdlc partner sdlc poll-pause-timer sdlc saps sdlc simultaneous sdlc T1 sdlc T2 sdlc xid sdlc role sdlc vmac show dlsw bridge-entry show dlsw capabilities show dlsw circuits show dlsw peers show dlsw reachability debug dlsw debug sllc

4.1 clear dlsw bridge-entry

To clear the buffer memory information of DLSw bridge group entry, use the clear dlsebridge-entry command.



4-2

clear dlsw bridge-entry

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The command will clear the buffer memory information of DLSw bridge group entry.

4.2 clear dlsw circuits

To clear DLSw circuits information, use the clear dlsw circuit command.

clear dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ]

Syntax Description

circuit-id Circuit ID for a specific remote circuit, ranging 0 to 4294967295.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

A user can clear all the DLSw circuits information or the DLSw circuit information of aspecific IP address.

4.3 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)

To link DLSw to the bridge group of the Ethernet LANs, use the dlsw bridge-groupcommand. Use the no form of this command to disable the link.

dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number

no dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number

Syntax Description

bridge-group-number Transparent bridge group to which DLSw will be attached,ranging 1 to 63, which is also valid at local.

Default

No default value.

Command Mode




4-3

Usage Guideline

To forward the messages of the specified bridge group to the remote end over TCPconnection, you need to use this command to connect a local bridge group to DLSw. Inother words, the messages of the local bridge group can be forwarded to the remoteend through TCP channel. You can use the command several times to connect severalbridge groups to DLSw, so that all of them can be forwarded through TCP channel.

4.4 dlsw bridge-group (Ethernet interface configuration)

To link DLSw to the Ethernet interface, use the dlsw bridge-group bridge-group-number command. Use the no form of this command to disable the link.



Syntax Description

bridge-group-number Transparent bridge group to which the Ethernet interface will belinked, ranging 1 to 63.

Default

No Ethernet interface is added to the bridge group.

Usage Guideline

After adding an Ethernet interface to a bridge group, the LLC2 packets of the Ethernetinterface can send to the remote peer entity through the corresponding TCP channel.

4.5 dlsw bridge-group (synchronous interface configuration)

To link DLSw to the synchronous interface, which encapsulated SDLC, use the dlswbridge-group command. Use the no form of this command to disable the link.



Syntax Description

bridge-group-number Transparent bridge group to which DLSw will be attached,ranging 1 to 63.

Default

No synchronous interface is added to the bridge group.

Usage Guideline

To allow the synchronous interface encapsulated with SDLC to participate in DLSwforwarding, you need to use this command to add SDLC interface to a bridge group.The bridge group on Ethernet interface takes part in the local forwarding, but the bridge



4-4

group configured in the SDLC only takes part in DLSw forwarding, that is, all of the dataon it will be forwarded to TCP channels.

4.6 dlsw disable

To disable DLSw without altering the configuration, use the dlsw disable command.Use the no form of this command to enable DLSw again.

dlsw disable

no dlsw disable

Default

Disable DLSw.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

After using this command, the system will release all the dynamic resources butreserve the existing configuration.

4.7 dlsw local-peer tcp

To create entities of the DLSw local peer, use the dlsw local-peer command. Use theno form of this command to remove the entities.

dlsw local-peer tcp ip-address [cost cost ] [init-pacing-window init-window-size ][ keepalive keepalive-interval] [ lf lf-size ] [ max-pacing-window max-window-size ][ promiscuous ]

no dlsw local-peer tcp ip-address

Syntax Description

ip-address local peer IP address.

cost cost peer cost advertised to remote peers in the capability exchange, ranging 1 to5.

init-window-size size of the initial pacing window as defined in RFC 1795, ranging 1 to2000 bytes.

keepalive-interval default remote peer keepalive interval in seconds, ranging 0 to 1200seconds.

lf-size largest frame size for this local peer, which can be: 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472,8144, 11407, 11454 or 17800 bytes.

max-window-size maximum size of the pacing window as defined in RFC 1795,ranging 1 to 2000 bytes.

promiscuous indicates that the remote router not configured beforehand is allowed toinitiate connection and create dynamically peer entity. The end using the parameter



4-5

doesn’t need to configure the remote peer entity, instead waiting for the remote end toinitiate connection.

Default

cost is 3.

init-window-size is 40 bytes.

keepalive-interval is 30 seconds.

lf-size is 1500 bytes.

max-window-size is 50 bytes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Creating TCP channel is the first step for establishing DLSw connection. To create TCPchannel, you have to firstly configure DLSw local peer entity in order to specify the IPaddress of the local end for establishing TCP connection, then the request sent by theremote end router can be received for establishing TCP connection. One router canonly have one local peer entity.

4.8 dlsw remote-peer tcp

To create entities of the DLSw remote peer, use the dlsw remote-peer command. Usethe no form of this command to remove the entities.

dlsw remote-peer tcp ip-address [ cost cost ] [ keepalive keepalive-interval ] [ lf lf-size ] [ tcp-queue-max max-queue-length ] [ timeout seconds ]

no dlsw remote-peer tcp ip-address

Syntax Description

ip-address IP address of the remote peer with which the router is to communicate.

cost cost to reach this remote peer, ranging 1 to 5.

keepalive-interval sets the keepalive interval for this remote peer, ranging 0 to 1200seconds.

lf-size largest frame size, in bytes, this local peer uses on a circuit to avoid segmentedframes, which can be: 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454 or 17800bytes.

max-queue-length maximum output TCP queue size for this remote peer., ranging 50to 2000 bytes.

seconds retransmit time limit for TCP, ranging 5 to1200 seconds.

Default

cost is 3.



4-6

keepalive-interval is 30 seconds.

lf-size is 1500 bytes.

max-queue-length is 200 bytes.

seconds is 90 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

You need to configure the remote end peer entity to establish TCP channel afterconfiguring the local peer entity. The router will continuously attempt to establish TCPconnection with the remote end router. One router can configure several remote endpeer entities. TCP channels can be connected with several remote end routers byconfiguring several remote end peer entities.

4.9 dlsw timer

To configure the parameters of DLSw timer, use the dlsw timer command. Use the noform of this command to restore the default parameters.

dlsw timer [ connected-timeout seconds ] [ explorer-wait-timeout seconds ][ local-pending-timeout seconds ] [ remote-pending-timeout seconds ] [ sna-cache-timeout seconds ] [ sna-explorer-timeout seconds ]

no dlsw timer

Syntax Description

connected-timeout seconds length of time that the software waits for an explorerresponse before marking a resource unreachable, ranging 60 to 60000 seconds.

explorer-wait-timeout seconds time to wait for all stations to respond to explorers.,ranging 1 to 60000 seconds.

local-pending-timeout seconds time to wait for local pending, ranging 1 to 60000seconds.

remote-pending-timeout seconds time to wait for the remote peer pending, ranging 1to 60000 seconds.

sna-cache-timeout seconds length of time that a SNA MAC/service access point(SAP) location cache entry exists before it is discarded (for local and remote caches),ranging 1 to 60000 seconds.

sna-explorer-timeout seconds length of time that a SNA explorer exists before it isdiscarded, ranging 1 to 60000 seconds.

Default

connected-timeout seconds is 300 seconds.

explorer-wait-timeout seconds is 10 seconds.

local-pending-timeout seconds is 10 seconds.



4-7

remote-pending-timeout seconds is 30 seconds.

sna-cache-timeout seconds is 120 seconds.

sna-explorer-timeout seconds is 30 seconds.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The values of various timers used when DLSw established virtual circuits can bemodified by configuring DLSw protocol timer. It is recommended that subscribers donot modify or configure the parameters of DLSw timers in the common conditions.

4.10 encapsulation sdlc

To set SDLC as the link layer encapsulation protocol of synchronous interfaces, use theencapsulation sdlc command.

encapsulation sdlc

Default

The link layer protocol encapsulated at synchronous interface is PPP

Command Mode

Synchronous interface configuration mode

Usage Guideline

SDLC is a link layer protocol relative to SNA. The working principle is very similar toHDLC. To allow DLSw to operate normally, the encapsulation protocol of synchronousinterface link layer should be changed to SDLC.

Notes that SDLC link protocol can not load IP protocol, so you should remove all of thecommands related with IP, such as delete interface IP address, before encapsulatingSDLC.

4.11 idle-mark

To assign the encoding mode for the idle time of synchronous interface, use the idle-mark command. To restore the default encoding mode for the idle time of synchronousinterface, use the no form of this command.

idle-mark

no idle-mark

Default

The synchronous interface adopts “7E” encoding mode



4-8

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The SDLC serial ports encapsulated by Quidway series of routers is identified with “7E”during the idle time, but all of the serial ports on some SDLC equipment use high levelworking status “1” during the idle time. To improve the compatibility with the equipment,you need to change the idle time encoding mode of our routers.

You may need to configure this command when connecting AS/400, that is, to changethe idle time encoding mode in order to accelerate the polling rate of AS/400.

4.12 llc2 ack-delay-time

To set the amount of time the software waits for an acknowledgment before sending thenext set of information frames, use the llc2 ack-delay-time command. To revert to thedefault setting, use the no form of this command.

llc2 ack-delay-time mseconds

no llc2 ack-delay-time

Syntax Description

mseconds Number of milliseconds the software allows incoming information frames tostay unacknowledged, ranging 1 to 60000ms.

Default

The local acknowledgement delay time of LLC2 is 100ms.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Upon receiving an information frame, each LLC2 station starts a timer. If the timerexpires, an acknowledgment will be sent for the frame, even if the llc2 ack-max numberof received frames has not been reached. Experiment with the value of the llc2 ack-delay-time command to determine the configuration that balances acknowledgmentnetwork overhead and quick response time (by receipt of timely acknowledgments).

4.13 llc2 ack-max

To control the maximum length of information frames the software can receive before itmust send an acknowledgment, use the llc2 ack-max command. To revert to thedefault setting, use the no form of this command.

llc2 ack-max length

no llc2 ack-max



4-9

Syntax Description

length maximum length of packets the software will receive before sending anacknowledgment, ranging 1 to 127 bytes.

Default

The length of the LLC2 premature acknowledgement window is 3 bytes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

An LLC2-speaking station can send only a predetermined number of frames before itmust wait for an acknowledgment from the receiver. If the receiver waits until receivinga large number of frames before acknowledging any of them, and then acknowledgesthem all at once, it reduces overhead on the network.

For example, an acknowledgment for five frames can specify that all five have beenreceived, as opposed to sending a separate acknowledgment for each frame. To keepnetwork overhead low, make this parameter as large as possible.

4.14 llc2 local-window

To control the maximum length of information frames the software sends before it waitsfor an acknowledgment, use the llc2 local-window command. To revert to the defaultsetting, use the no form of this command.

llc2 local-window length

no llc2 local-window

Syntax Description

length maximum length of packets that can be sent before the software must wait foran acknowledgment, ranging 1 to 127 bytes.

Default

The length of the local acknowledgement window of LLC2 is 7 bytes.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

An LLC2-speaking station can send only a predetermined number of frames before itmust wait for an acknowledgment from the receiver. Set this number to the maximumvalue that can be supported by the stations with which the router communicates.Setting this value too large can cause frames to be lost, because the receiving stationmay not be able to receive all of them.



4-10

4.15 llc2 modulus

To set the modulus used by LLC2, use the modulus command. To restore the defaultmodulus used by LLC2, use the no form of the command.

llc2 modulus n

no llc2 modulus

Syntax Description

n the modulo value used by LLC2, which can be 8 or 128.

Default

The modulo value used by LLC2 is 128.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

LLC2 uses module mode to number the information message like X25 protocol. Themodulo value is 8 or 128. Ethernet generally uses module 128.

4.16 llc2 N2

To control the amount of times the software retries sending unacknowledged frames orrepolls remote busy stations, use the llc2 n2 command. To revert to the default setting,use the no form of this command.

llc2 N2 retries

no llc2 N2

Syntax Description

retries number of times the software retries operations, ranging 1 to 255.

Default

The retries time is 20 retries

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The number of times that an LLC2 station retries sending indicates the number of timesit will redirect information frames when the receiver of that frame has not acknowledgedit.



4-11

4.17 llc2 t1-time

To control the amount of time the software will wait before redirecting unacknowledgedinformation frames, use the llc2 t1-time command. To revert to the default setting, usethe no form of this command.

llc2 t1-time mseconds

no llc2 t1-time

Syntax Description

mseconds number of ms the software waits before redirecting unacknowledgedinformation frames, ranging 1 to 60000 ms.

Default

The local acknowledgement time of LLC2 is 200ms

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The local acknowledgement time of LLC2 indicates the maximum waiting time for thereceiver’s answer after a LLC2 data packet is sent out.

4.18 llc2 tbusy-time

To control the amount of time the software waits until repolling a busy remote station,use the llc2 tbusy-time interface configuration command. To revert to the default setting,use the no form of this command.

llc2 tbusy-time mseconds

no llc2 tbusy-time

Syntax Description

mseconds Number of ms the software waits before repolling a busy remote station,ranging 1 to 60000 ms.

Default

BUSY status time for LLC2 is 300 ms

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

BUSY status time for LLC2 indicates the amount of time the software waits untilrepolling a busy remote station.



4-12

4.19 llc2 tpf-time

To set the amount of time the software waits for a final response to a poll frame beforeredirecting the poll frame, use the llc2 tpf-time command. To revert to the defaultsetting, use the no form of this command.

llc2 tpf-time mseconds

no llc2 tpf-time

Syntax Description

mseconds number of ms the software waits for a final response to a poll frame beforeredirecting the poll frame, ranging 1 to 60000ms.

Default

The P/F wait time of LLC2 is 5000 ms

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The P/F wait time of LLC2 indicates the amount of time the software waits for thecorrect information frame after sending the P frame.

4.20 llc2 trej-time

To control the amount of time the software waits for a correct frame after sending areject command to the remote LLC2 station, use the llc2 trej-time command. To revertto the default setting, use the no form of this command.

llc2 trej-time mseconds

no llc2 trej-time

Syntax Description

mseconds number of ms the software waits for a redirect of a rejected frame beforesending a reject command to the remote station, ranging 1 to 60000 ms.

Default

The rejected frame waiting time of LLC2 is 3200 ms

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The REJ status time of LLC2 indicates the amount of time the software waits for acorrect frame after sending a reject command to the remote LLC2 station.



4-13

4.21 llc2 txq-max

To control the queue length of messages sent of LLC2, use the ll2 txq-max command.To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

llc2 txq-max length

no llc2 txq-max

Syntax Description

length queue length of messages sent of LLC2, ranging 20 to 200 bytes.

Default

The queue length of messages sent of LLC2 is 20 bytes

Command Mode


4.22 sdlc address

To assign a set of secondary stations attached to the serial link, use the sdlc addresscommand. To remove an assigned secondary station, use the no form of thiscommand.

sdlc addr sdlc-address

no sdlc addr sdlc-address

Syntax Description

sdlc-address hexadecimal number (base 16) indicating the address of the serial link.

Default

No secondary stations are assigned

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

SDLC protocol permits that several virtual circuits exist in a SDLC physics link. The oneend connects to the primary station and the other end connects to the secondarystation. You should specify the SDLC address of each virtual circuit so as todifferentiate each virtual circuit. SDLC is unbalanced mode through sharer or SDLCswitch. One primary equipment can be connected with several secondary equipmentand the relationship is unique. However, connection can not be established betweensecondary equipment. It can ensure that communication normally operates in onegroup of SDLC equipment only if the addresses of secondary equipment are identified.This command is used to specify SDLC address for virtual circuit. The address is



4-14

unique in a physical interface. The SDLC address configured on the synchronousinterface is de facto the address of SDLC secondary station.

SDLC addresses range from 0x01 to 0xFE. The SDLC address on a router is valid forone physical interface. That is, the SDLC addresses configured on the differentinterfaces can be same.

4.23 sdlc holdq

To control the maximum length of packets that can be held in a buffer before beingtransmitted to a remote SDLC station, use the sdlc holdq command. To revert to thedefault setting, use the no form of this command.

sdlc holdq length

no sdlc holdq

Syntax Description

length queue length of messages sent of SDLC, ranging 20 to 255 bytes.

Default

The queue length of messages sent of SDLC is 20 bytes

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command can configure the queue length of the messages sent of SDLC.

4.24 sdlc k

To set the window size in order to control the maximum number of information framesthe software transmits before it must stop transmitting and wait for an acknowledgmentfrom the receiving router, use the sdlc k command. To revert to the default setting, usethe no form of this command.

sdlc k length

no sdlc k

Syntax Description

length length of the local acknowledgement window, ranging 1 to 7 bytes.

Default

The length of the local acknowledgement window of SDLC is 7 bytes

Command Mode




4-15

Usage Guideline

The local acknowledgement window of SDLC indicates the maximum number ofinformation frames it will send before it must stop sending and wait for anacknowledgment.

4.25 sdlc modulus

To set the modulus used by SDLC, use the sdlc modulus command. To restore thedefault modulus used by SDLC, use the no form of the command.

sdlc modulus n

no sdlc modulus

Syntax Description

n modulo value used by SDLC, which can be 8 or 128.

Default

The modulo value used by SDLC is 8

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

SDLC uses module mode to number the information message like X25 protocol. Themodulo value is 8 or 128. SDLC generally uses module 8.

4.26 sdlc n1

To control the maximum size of an incoming frame, use the sdlc n1 command. Torevert to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

sdlc n1 n

no sdlc n1

Syntax Description

n number indicating bit size. Frames that exceed this size are rejected, ranging 1 to17680 bytes

Default

The maximum frame length receivable of SDLC is 265 bytes

Command Mode




4-16

Usage Guideline

Maximum frame length of SDLC refers to byte number of maximum transmissible andreceivable message, not including parity bit and stop bit.

Generally, the length is 265 for some PU2.0 equipment and 521 for IBM AS/400.Weoften need to configure our equipment to be the same values as the connected SDLCequipment.

4.27 sdlc n2

To determine the number of retries that the software resends a frame beforeterminating the SDLC session, use the sdlc n2 command. To revert to the defaultsetting, use the no form of this command.

sdlc n2 retries

no sdlc n2

Syntax Description

retries number of retry attempts, ranging 1 to 255.

Default

The retransmission number of SDLC is 20 retries

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The retransmission number N2 of SDLC refers to the retransmission number beforereceiving no acknowledgement packet sent by the other part.

4.28 sdlc partner

To specify the peer with which an LLC session is established for the SDLC station, usethe sdlc partner command. To cancel the configuration, use the no form of thiscommand.

sdlc partner mac-addr sdlc-addr

no sdlc partner mac-addr sdlc-addr

Syntax Description

mac-addr the 48-bit Media Access Control (MAC) address.

sdlc-address SDLC address of the serial device that will communicate with the host,ranging 1 to FE.



4-17

Default

Synchronous interface without SDLC address

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command is used to specify a next-hop MAC address on the other end for a SDLCvirtual address so as to provide the destination MAC address when transforming fromSDLC to LLC2. When setting up DLSw, one SDLC address should be configured withone corresponding partner. The MAC address of partner shall be the MAC address ofthe remote end SNA equipment (physical addresses of such equipment as Ethernetand Token-Ring) or next-hop MAC address composed of SDLC.

4.29 sdlc poll-pause-timer

To control how long the software pauses between sending each poll frame tosecondary stations on a single serial interface, use the sdlc poll-pause-timercommand. To retrieve the default value, use the no form of this command.

sdlc poll-pause-timer mseconds

no sdlc poll-pause-timer

Syntax Description

mseconds number of ms that the software waits before sending the poll frame to asingle serial interface, ranging 1 to 10000ms.

Default

The poll time interval of SDLC is 100ms

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Poll time interval of SDLC refers to wait time interval between two SDLC nodes polledby SDLC primary station.

4.30 sdlc saps

Configure SDLC to transform the SAP address of LLC2. The no form the command isused to restore the default value of the SAP address of LLC2.

sdlc saps sdlc-addr lsap lsap

no sdlc saps sdlc-addr



4-18

Syntax Description

sdlc-addr SDLC address.

lsap Virtual SAP address set up for the connective equipment of the interface.

dsap SAP address of the specified DLSw opposite end equipment.

Default

Both lsap and lsap of LLC2 are 04.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

When transforming SDLC message to LLC2 message, it also need SAP addressbesides MAC address. This command is used to specify SAP address used whentransforming llc2 for a SDLC byte.

Generally, the SAP address used by SNA protocol is 0x04, 0x08 or 0x0C.

4.31 sdlc simultaneous

To enable an interface configured as a primary SDLC station to operate insimultaneous mode, use the sdlc simultaneous command. To disable this function,use the no form of this command.

sdlc simultaneous

no sdlc simultaneous

Default

By default, the SDLC driver supports alternative mode.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Use this command to enable the simultaneous interface encapsulated with SDLC tooperate in alternate mode. That is to say, the simultaneous mode enables the interfaceconfigured as a primary SDLC station to send data to a secondary station, even when itis receiving data from another secondary station.

4.32 sdlc T1

To control the amount of time the software waits for a primary station acknowledgmentframe or sequence of frames, use the sdlc t1 command. To revert to the default value,use the no form of this command.



4-19

sdlc t1 mseconds

no sdlc t1

Syntax Description

mseconds number of ms that the software waits for an acknowledgment packet fromprimary station, ranging 1 to 60000ms.

Default

Configure the acknowledgement wait time T1 of SDLC Primary Station to be 3000 ms.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Acknowledgement wait time T2 of secondary station refers to the duration that thesecondary station waits for acknowledgement from secondary station after sendinginformation frame.

4.33 sdlc T2

To control the amount of time the software waits for a secondary stationacknowledgment frame or sequence of frames, use the sdlc t2 command. To revert tothe default value, use the no form of this command.

sdlc t2 mseconds

no sdlc t2

Syntax Description

mseconds Number of ms that the software waits for an acknowledgment packet fromprimary station, ranging 1 to 60000ms.

Default

The acknowledgement wait time of SDLC secondary station T2 is 500ms.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

Acknowledgement wait time T3 of secondary station refers to the duration that theprimary station waits for acknowledgement from primary station after sendinginformation frame.



4-20

4.34 sdlc xid

To specify an exchange ID (XID) value appropriate for the designated SDLC stationassociated with this serial interface, use the sdlc xid command. To disable XIDprocessing for this address, use the no form of this command.

sdlc xid sdlc-address xid-number

no sdlc xid sdlc-address

Syntax Description

sdlc-address address of the SDLC station associated with this interface.

xid-number XID the software will use to respond to XID requests the router receives,whose first 12bit is network number and last 24bit is node number.

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

XID is an identification of the equipment identity in the SNA world. Generally, there aretwo kinds of equipment - PU2.0 and PU2.1.PU2.1 equipment itself is configured withXID, so it can show the identities of each other by exchanging XID; while PU2.0equipment doesn’t exchange XID, thus there is no XID. Therefore, the equipment ofPU2.1 type doesn’t need to be configured with this command, while PU2.0 equipmentneeds it to specify one XID.

4.35 sdlc role

To establish the router to be either a primary or secondary SDLC station, use the sdlcrole command. To cancel the designation, use the no form of this command.

sdlc role { primary | secondary }

no sdlc role

Syntax Description

primary establishes the router as a primary station.

secondary establishes the router as a secondary station.

Default

No default role is assigned

Command Mode




4-21

Usage Guideline

SDLC is a link layer protocol in the unbalanced mode. In another words, the connectedequipment on the both ends does not have unequal priority. One of the parts is theprimary station that plays the leading role and controls the whole connection processand its role is primary. The other part is the secondary station that is controlled in apassive mode and its role is secondary. Subscribers need to configure role for theinterface encapsulated with SDLC protocol.

SDLC role shall be configured according to the role of SDLC equipment connectingwith this router. If SDLC equipment connecting with the interface is primary, theinterface should be set to secondary. If the connected equipment is secondary, theinterface should be set to primary.

Generally, the central IBM mainframes are primary, and terminal equipment aresecondary, such as Unix host and ATM machine.

4.36 sdlc vmac

To configure a MAC address for the serial interface, use the sdlc vmac command. Todisable the configuration, use the no form of this command.

sdlc vmac mac-address

no sdlc vmac

Syntax Description

mac-addres 48-bit MAC address of the host.

Default

Disabled

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

This command must be configured if you plan to configure DLSw. The last byte of theaddress must be 00.

4.37 show dlsw bridge-entry

To display the bridge group information, use the show dlsw bridge-entry command.

show dlsw bridge-entry

Command Mode




4-22

Example

Quidway# show dlsw bridge-engrymac_entry Port group hashIndex0000.e81c.b6bf Ethernet0 1 79

4.38 show dlsw capabilities

To display the performance exchange information of DLSw, use the show dlswcapabilities command.

show dlsw capabilities [ local ] [ ip-address ]

Syntax Description

local show local information for performance exchange.

ip-address show performance exchange information with specified IP address.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline

The output information of this command is helpful for the user to conduct IPX flowstatistics and fault diagnosis.

Example

Quidway# show dlsw capabilitiesDLSw: Capabilities for peer 14.0.0.1 Vendor ID (OUI) : 00000c Version number : 01 Release number : 00 Init Pacing Window : 40 Num of TCP sessions : 01 Mac address exclusive : no NetBIOS Name exclusive : no Mac address List : none NetBIOS Name List : none Configured IP address : 14.0.0.1 Version string : VRP (tm) 3640 series software, Version 1.3.1, RELEASE(1) Copyright (c) 1997-2001 HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD.Quidway# show dlsw capabilities localDLSw: Capabilities for peer 12.0.0.1 Vendor ID (OUI): '00e0fc' (HuaWei) Version number: 1 Release number: 0 Init Pacing Window: 40 Num of TCP sessions: 1 Mac address exclusive: no NetBIOS Name exclusive: no Mac address List: none NetBIOS Name List: none Configured IP address: 12.0.0.1 Version string: VRP (tm) 2630 series software, Version 1.3.1, RELEASE(1) Copyright (c) 1997-2001 HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD.



4-23

4.39 show dlsw circuits

To display the virtual circuit information of DLSw, use the show dlsw circuitscommand.

show dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ] [ detail ]

Syntax Description

circuit-id displays the virtual circuit number of DLSw, ranging 0 to 4294967295.

detail displays the ordinary detailed information of the virtual circuit.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline


Example

Quidway# show dlsw circuitsCorrelator local addr(lsap) remote addr(rsap) state0x00a2000a 0000.1738.6dfd(04) 0000.1722.3435(04) CONNECTEDQuidway# show dlsw circuits detailCorrelator local addr(lsap) remote addr(rsap) state0x00a2000a 0000.1738.6dfd(04) 0000.1722.3435(04) CONNECTEDPort: Ethernet0 Peer: 14.0.0.1 Direction: 1 LifeTime: 14:19:49FC Tx CW:40, PT:40; Rx CW:40, GT:40; FCI:0; Delay:0; Op:0Local-Ack Vs:0, Vr:0, VaSend:0, VaRecv:0, CW-Tx:0, CW-Rx:0DLC_STATE: 3, Vt:0 Wack-len:0, Send-len:0 SSP-tx: 0 SSP-rx: 0I-frame: tx 0 rx 0 dx 0

4.40 show dlsw peers

To display the remote end peer entity information, use the show dlsw peerscommand.

show dlsw peers [ ip-address ]

Syntax Description

ip-address displays the remote end peer entity information with certain IP address.

Command Mode


Usage Guideline




4-24

Example

Quidway# show dlsw peers Peers: State pkts_rx pkts_tx drops uptime TCP 11.0.0.1 DISCONNECT 0 0 0 - TCP 13.0.0.1 DISCONNECT 0 0 0 - TCP 14.0.0.1 CONNECT 1897 1899 0 14:26:22

4.41 show dlsw reachability

To display the information of MAC buffers, use the show dlsw reachablity command.

show dlsw reachability

Command Mode


Usage Guideline


Example

Quidway# show dlsw reachability DLSw Local MAC address reachability cache list Mac addr status Loc. Port 0000.3817.fd6d FOUND LOCAL Ethernet0 DLSw Remote MAC address reachability cache list Mac addr status Loc. Peer 0000.2217.3534 FOUND REMOTE 14.0.0.1

4.42 debug dlsw

Enable the debugging information of DLSw, use the debug dlsw command.

debug dlsw [ circuit | core |event | packet | peers ]

Syntax Description

circuit enables the DLSw circuit, open the debugging.

core enables the DLSw status machine debugging .

event enables the DLSw abnormal events debugging.

packet enables the DLSw messages debugging.

peers enables the DLSw peer entity debugging.

Command Mode




4-25

4.43 debug sllc

Enable the information debugging of SDLC.

debug dlsw [ event | event ]

Syntax Description

event enables the SDLC events debugging.

event enables the SDLC events debugging .

Command Mode


How Are We Doing

Let us share your comments with respect to the contents, formats and wording of thismanual. Your feedback can be of great value in helping us improve our document. Pleaseuse a copy of these two pages for your comments, and fax to: +86-755-6540035Documentation Development Department.

1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:

Excellent Good Fair Poor

Ease of Use

Clarity

Completeness

Accuracy

Organization Structure

Appearance

Examples

Illustrations

Overall Satisfaction

2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document: Improve the overview/introduction Make it more brief/concise Improve the table of contents Add more step-by-step procedures Improve the organization structure Add more troubleshooting info. Include more figures Make it less technical Add more examples Add more reference aids Add more details Improve the index

Please provide details for the suggested improvement:

3. What did you like most about this document?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

5. It is highly appreciated for any specific mistakes you have found (this page may be sent tous separately).

Mistake Suggested Correction Page &Line No.

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:

Name:______________________ Tel: _____________________________

Company:________________________________ Date:________________

Address:_______________________________________________________

31010794-vrp1.5 command reference volume 1

Documents

val 05dc magicnumber

versatile routing platform

file oversize 0x18

related commandx25 tx0

technical support engineer

technical support engineers

related commandx25 hic

technical support personnel